- No category
advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 358
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these instructions before using this product.) Before using this product, thoroughly read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual and pay careful attention to safety and handle the products properly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system, refer to the User’s Manual for the CPU module. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as " WARNING" and " CAUTION". WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury. CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage. Note that the CAUTION level may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances. Always follow the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal safety. Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user. [Design Instructions] WARNING ● When data change, program change, or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller, create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole system always operates safely. Furthermore, for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU, the corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as a system. [Startup/Maintenance Instructions] CAUTION ● The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller CPU (Program change when a programmable controller CPU is RUN, operating status changes such as forced input/output operation and RUN-STOP switching, and remote control operation) must be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured. When changing a program while a programmable controller CPU is RUN, it may cause a program corruption in some operating conditions. Fully understand the precautions described in GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) before use. ● The positioning test functions of OPR, JOG, inching or positioning data for QD75/LD75 positioning module must be executed with the programmable controller set to STOP after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured. Specially when executing the function on the network system, ensure the safety thoroughly since the machinery whose operation cannot be checked by an operator may be activated. The operation failure may cause the injury or machine damage. A-1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT (1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions; i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious accident; and ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT. (2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries. MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT. ("Prohibited Application") Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in; • Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT. • Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User. • Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property. Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region. A-2 REVISIONS Print date Manual number*1 Revision Jul. 2008 SH(NA)-080780ENG-A First edition Jan. 2009 SH(NA)-080780ENG-B Model Addition Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, FX series Addition MANUALS, Section 2.2.8, Section 2.2.9, Section 5.2.2, Section 5.3.5, Section 11.3.4 Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.1, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 2.1, Section 3.1, Section 5.2.1, Section 5.2.3, Section 5.3.3, Section 5.4, Section 5.6, Section 5.6.2, Section 7.1.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.1.5, Section 7.1.6, Section 8.2, Section 8.2.1, Section 8.3, Section 8.4, Section 8.5.1, Section 9.2, Section 9.3, Section 9.4, Section 9.5, Section 9.8, Section 9.8.1, Section 10.1, Section 11.1, Section 11.3.2, Section 12.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.5, Appendix 1.6 Modification Section 5.1 → Chapter 5, Section 5.2 → Chapter 6, Chapter 6 to 11 → Chapter 7 to 12 Jul. 2009 SH(NA)-080780ENG-C Model Addition Q00J, Q00, Q01 Addition Chapter 4, Section 6.4, Section 6.5, Section 6.15, Section 9.5 Correction MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.2, Section 1.3, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.2.3, Section 2.2.7, Section 2.3.1, Section 3.1, Section 5.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 5.4, Section 5.5, Section 5.6.1, Section 5.7, Section 6.2.1, Section 6.2.4, Section 6.3.4, Section 7.1, Section 7.2, Section 7.3, Section 7.4, Section 7.5, Section 7.8, Section 7.9, Section 7.10, Section 7.11, Section 8.2, Chapter 10, Section 11.1, Section 12.5, Section 13.2, Appendix 1 Modification Chapter 4 to Chapter 12 → Chapter 5 to Chapter 13, Section 5.4 to Section 5.12 → Section 5.6 to Section 5.14 Deletion Section 7.1.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.1.3, Section 7.1.5 Oct. 2009 SH(NA)-080780ENG-D Correction MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 5.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 5.4, Section 6.4.5, Section 13.1, Section 13.2, Appendix 1.2 Jan. 2010 SH(NA)-080780ENG-E Model Addition L02, L26-BT Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Correction MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.2, Section 1.3, Section 2.1, Section 2.2.9, Section 4.1, Section 5.2, Section 6.2.2, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.4, Section 6.10, Section 6.15, Section 7.9, Section 7.11.2, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.4, Section 9.7, Section 10.2.1, Section 11.1, Section 12.4, Chapter 13, Appendix 1 Apr. 2010 SH(NA)-080780ENG-F Model Addition Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH, LJ72GF15-T2 Addition Section 2.3.3, Section 2.3.6, Section 7.2, Section 7.8.2, Section 7.8.3, Section 7.13, Section 7.14 Correction MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.2, Section 1.3, Section 2.3.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 5.4, Section 5.5.2, Section 5.7, Section 6.15, Section 7.1, Section 7.3.1, Section 7.3.2, Section 7.3.3, Section 7.3.4, Section 7.3.5, Section 7.3.6, Section 7.3.7, Section 7.3.8, Section 7.3.9, Section 7.9, Section 8.2.5, Section 10.2.1, Section 10.2.2, Section 10.2.5, Section 12.5.1, Section 13.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6 Modification Section 2.3.3 to Section 2.3.4 → Section 2.3.4 to Section 2.3.5, Section 7.2 to Section 7.11 → Section 7.3 to Section 7.12 A-3 Print date Sept. 2010 Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080780ENG-G Revision Addition Section 5.8 Correction Section 1.2, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 1.3.4, Section 2.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 5.4, Section 5.5.2, Section 5.7, Section 6.2.1, Section 6.2.3, Section 6.2.4, Section 6.2.6, Section 6.3.6, Section 6.4.3, Section 6.4.5, Section 6.15, Section 7.1, Section 7.9.2, Section 7.9.3, Section 7.12.2, Section 8.1.2, Section 8.2.3, Section 9.3, Section 9.6.2, Section 10.2.1, Section 10.2.2, Section 10.2.3, Section 10.2.5, Section 11.1, Section 12.5.1, Section 13.1.2, Section 14.2, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6 Jan. 2011 SH(NA)-080780ENG-H Addition TERMS, Section 5.5.1, Section 5.5.2, Section 6.16 Correction MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.2, Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1, Section 2.2.6, Section 4.1, Section 5.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 5.4, Section 5.5.3, Section 5.6.1, Section 6.2.7, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.5, Section 6.4.2, Section 6.10.1, Section 7.1, Section 7.3.7, Section 8.1.2, Section 10.2.1, Section 10.2.2, Section 12.4, Section 13.1, Section 13.2, Appendix 1 Modification Section 5.5.1 to Section 5.5.2 → Section 5.5.3 to Section 5.5.4 Mar. 2011 SH(NA)-080780ENG-I Addition Section 10.3 Correction MANUALS, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.3, Section 5.4, Section 5.5.2, Section 5.5.3, Section 5.7, Section 5.7.1, Section 6.2.1, Section 6.3.6, Section 6.4.5, Section 7.13, Section 10.2.1, Section 11.1, Section 13.2, Appendix 1, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.6 Modification Section 10.3 → Section 10.4 Jul. 2011 SH(NA)-080780ENG-J Model Addition L02-P, L26-PBT Addition Section 2.2.5, Section 6.1.2, Section 8.1.1, Section 8.2.2, Section 9.5, Appendix 1.2 Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.2, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 2.1, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.2.6, Section 2.2.8, Section 2.3.1, Section 4.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 5.4, Section 5.7.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2.4, Section 6.2.6, Section 6.2.7, Section 6.4.1, Section 6.4.2, Section 6.4.3, Section 6.4.4, Section 6.6.2, Section 6.8.2, Section 7.9.1, Section 8.1, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 9.2.3, Section 9.3, Section 9.5, Section 10.2.1, Section 10.2.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 11.1, Section 12.1, Section 12.5.1, Section 13.1, Section 13.2, Appendix 1 Modification Section 2.2.6 to Section 2.2.9 → Section 2.2.7 to Section 2.2.10, Section 8.1.1 to Section 8.1.2 → Section 8.1.2 to Section 8.1.3, Section 8.2.2 to Section 8.2.5 → Section 8.2.3 to Section 8.2.6, Section 9.6 to Section 9.7 → Section 9.7 to Section 9.8, Section 10.2.5 → Section 10.3.3, Section 12.3.3 → Section 12.2.5, Appendix 1.2 to Appendix 1.8 → Appendix 1.3 to Appendix 1.9 Sept. 2011 A-4 SH(NA)-080780ENG-K Correction Section 1.3.1, Section 2.2.5, Section 6.6.2, Section 6.8.2, Section 8.2.2 Print date Nov. 2011 Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080780ENG-L Revision Addition Section 6.11.4, Section 6.16, Section 7.11.1, Section 7.11.2, Section 10.1.4, Section 12.3.2, Section 12.3.3, Section 12.4.1, Section 12.4.2, Section 12.4.3 Correction MANUALS, Section 1.2, Section 1.3, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 2.1, Section 2.2.2, Section 2.2.9, Section 2.3.2, Section 2.3.5, Section 5.2, Section 5.5.3, Section 5.5.4, Section 5.6.1, Section 5.6.3, Section 5.6.4, Section 6.2.1, Section 6.3, Section 6.4.1, Section 6.6.2, Section 6.8.2, Section 6.9.4, Section 6.11.3, Section 6.14, Section 7.3.1, Section 7.3.10, Section 7.4.2, Section 7.9.1, Section 7.10, Section 7.11, Section 7.11.3, Section 7.11.4, Section 7.12.2, Section 9.2.2, Section 9.3, Section 9.4, Section 9.7.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.2.1, Section 10.3.3, Section 12.4.5, Section 13.1, Section 13.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.3 Modification Section 6.16 → Section 6.17, Section 7.11.1 to Section 7.11.4 → Section 7.11.3 to Section 7.11.6, Section 10.1.4 → Section 10.1.5, Section 12.3 to Section 12.5 → Section 12.2 to Section 12.4, Chapter 13 → Chapter 12 Appendix 1.3 → Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.7 → Appendix 1.3 Deletion Section 1.3.5, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.4, Appendix 1.5, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 1.8, Appendix 1.9, The content regarding the methods for using function blocks are moved to GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block). Jan. 2012 SH(NA)-080780ENG-M Model Addition FX3GC Correction Section 1.3.1, Section 5.5.4, Section 5.7.1, Section 5.8, Section 6.14, Section 11.1, Section 13.2 May 2012 SH(NA)-080780ENG-N Model Addition Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q25PH, Q25PRH Addition Section 2.2.9, Section 2.2.10, Section 2.3.3, Section 5.5.4, Section 5.5.6, Section 6.2.8, Section 6.11.5 Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 2.1, Section 2.2.3, Section 2.2.8, Section 3.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.5.3, Section 5.6.1, Section 5.6.3, Section 5.6.4, Section 5.7.1, Section 6.2.1, Section 6.4.1, Section 6.4.5, Section 7.9.1, Section 7.11.1, Section 7.11.2, Section 8.2.1, Section 8.2.5, Section 10.3.3, Section 12.3.2, Section 13.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.3 Modification Section 2.2.9 to Section 2.2.10 → Section 2.2.11 to Section 2.2.12 Section 2.3.3 to Section 2.3.6 → Section 2.3.4 to Section 2.3.7 Section 5.5.4 → Section 5.5.5 Sept. 2012 SH(NA)-080780ENG-O Addition Section 5.7 Correction Section 1.3.1, Section 2.2.7, Section 2.2.10, Section 2.3.1, Section 3.1, Section 6.2.7, Section 6.12, Section 10.2.1, Section 10.2.2, Section 10.2.4, Section 10.3.2, Section 12.3.1, Section 13.1, Section 13.2 Modification Section 5.7 to Section 5.8 → Section 5.8 to Section 5.9 A-5 Print date Feb. 2013 Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080780ENG-P Revision Model Addition Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, Q26UDV, L02S, L06, L26 Addition Section 8.1.2, Section 12.3.2 Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 2.1, Section 5.5.5, Section 5.5.6, Section 6.2.8, Section 6.4.5, Section 6.11, Section 7.11, Section 7.11.1, Section 8.1.1, Section 9.5.2, Section 10.1.4, Section 10.2.4, Section 12.3.1, Section 13.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3 Modification Section 12.3.2 → Section 12.5 *1 : The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover. Japanese Manual Version SH-080731-Y This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual. 2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION A-6 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi integrated FA software, MELSOFT series. Before using the product, thoroughly read this manual to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance to ensure correct use. CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 2 REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 3 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 7 CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 7 MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 14 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 22 TERMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 23 1 2 OVERVIEW 1.1 What is Simple Project? 1-2 1.2 Features of Simple Project 1-2 1.3 List of Functions 1-4 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4 1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 1.3.3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10 1.3.4 List of functions for editing SFC block list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.1 Overview of Screen Configuration 2-2 2.2 Ladder Editor 2-4 2.3 2.2.1 Editing screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 2.2.2 Changing display size of editing screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 2.2.3 Changing text size on editing screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 2.2.4 Displaying/hiding comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 2.2.5 Displaying/hiding areas for monitored current values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 2.2.6 Setting number of rows and columns for displayed comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8 2.2.7 Setting number of contacts to be displayed on ladder programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9 2.2.8 Switching display between label names and devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12 2.2.9 Displaying labels and devices simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13 2.2.10 Setting display content of tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14 2.2.11 Hiding ladder blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15 2.2.12 Displaying step ladder (STL) instruction in contact format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 17 SFC Editor 2 - 18 A-7 2.3.1 3 Editing screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 18 2.3.2 Changing display size of editing screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 24 2.3.3 Changing text size on editing screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 24 2.3.4 Displaying MELSAP-L programs on SFC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 25 2.3.5 Displaying/hiding SFC step/transition comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 25 2.3.6 Setting number of columns for SFC diagram display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 26 2.3.7 Changing SFC display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 26 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3.1 4 Creating Programs 3-2 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4.1 5 Program Configurations of Simple Project 4-2 SETTING LABELS 5.1 The Type of Label Setting Editor 5-2 5.2 Setting Global Labels 5-3 5.3 Setting Local Labels for Programs 5-8 5.4 Setting Local Labels for Function Blocks 5 - 10 5.5 Common Operations for Setting Labels 5 - 12 5.6 5.5.1 Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12 5.5.2 Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13 5.5.3 Selecting data types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14 5.5.4 Label comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17 5.5.5 Editing rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17 5.5.6 Deleting unused labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21 Setting Structure Labels 5 - 23 5.6.1 Setting structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 5.6.2 Defining data type of label as structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24 5.6.3 Assigning devices to structure labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24 5.6.4 Assigning devices to structure array labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26 5.7 Checking Duplications of Devices Assigned to Global Labels 5 - 29 5.8 Setting Ranges for Devices Assigned Automatically 5 - 30 5.8.1 5.9 6 Considerations of automatically assigned devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31 Writing/Reading Data to/from CSV Files 5 - 33 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.1 A-8 Creating Ladder Programs 6-2 6.1.1 Switching between overwrite mode and insert mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 6.1.2 Switching between write mode and read mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3 6.2 Entering Instructions 6.2.1 6-6 Entering contacts, coils, and application instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6 6.2.2 Instruction help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12 6.2.3 Selecting the duplicated coil check function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14 6.2.4 Entering device comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15 6.2.5 Entering pointer numbers and interrupt pointer numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16 6.2.6 Opening local label setting screen for program being edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17 6.2.7 Creating wrapping lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17 6.2.8 Displaying/editing ladder blocks in list format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 20 6.3 Using Function Blocks 6 - 22 6.4 Using Inline Structured Text 6 - 23 6.4.1 Feature of Inline structured text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 23 6.4.2 Inserting inline structured text box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 24 6.4.3 Editing inline structured text program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25 6.4.4 Deleting inline structured text box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 27 6.4.5 Considerations for using Inline structured text function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 28 6.5 Moving Cursor to Start of Ladder Block 6 - 29 6.6 Drawing Lines 6 - 30 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.6.1 Drawing lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30 6.6.2 Entering vertical or horizontal lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 31 Deleting Contacts, Coils, and Application Instructions 6.7.1 Deleting contacts, coils, and application instructions in unit of instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 34 6.7.2 Deleting contacts, coils, and application instructions by setting a range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 35 6.7.3 Deleting a ladder block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 36 Deleting Lines 6 - 37 6.8.1 Deleting lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 37 6.8.2 Deleting vertical or horizontal lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 38 Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns 6 - 41 6.9.1 Inserting rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 41 6.9.2 Deleting rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 42 6.9.3 Inserting columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 43 6.9.4 Deleting columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 44 Batch Inserting and Deleting NOP Instructions 6 - 46 6.10.1 Batch inserting NOP instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46 6.10.2 Batch deleting NOP instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 47 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Ladder Programs 6 - 48 6.11.1 Pasting cut or copied elements in unit of instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 48 6.11.2 Pasting cut or copied elements by setting a range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 50 6.11.3 Pasting cut or copied ladder blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 51 6.11.4 Pasting ladder blocks consecutively. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 54 6.11.5 Copying elements and devices simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 59 Canceling Previous Operation 6.12.1 6.13 6 - 34 6 - 60 Operation applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 60 Restoring Ladder Programs to the Status of After Conversion 6 - 61 A-9 6.14 Considerations for Editing Ladder Programs 6 - 62 6.15 Changing T/C Setting Values 6 - 69 6.16 Writing/Reading List Format Programs 6 - 71 6.17 Setting Program Linkage Order (FXCPU) 6 - 75 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.1 List of SFC Elements 7-2 7.2 Difference between MELSAP3 and MELSAP-L 7-6 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams 7-9 7.4 7.3.1 Entering SFC steps ()/()/() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10 7.3.2 Entering block start steps ()/() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12 7.3.3 Entering series transitions () . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13 7.3.4 Entering selection divergences () . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15 7.3.5 Entering simultaneous divergences () . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16 7.3.6 Entering selection convergences () . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17 7.3.7 Entering simultaneous convergences () . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19 7.3.8 Entering jump transitions () . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 22 7.3.9 Entering end steps () . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23 7.3.10 Drawing lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24 7.3.11 Inserting/deleting rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25 Deleting SFC Diagrams 7 - 27 7.4.1 Deleting SFC elements by setting a range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27 7.4.2 Deleting only divergence/convergence/vertical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28 7.5 Changing SFC Step Attributes 7 - 29 7.6 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting SFC Diagrams 7 - 30 7.7 Sorting SFC Step/Transition Numbers 7 - 32 7.8 Redisplaying SFC Diagrams 7 - 33 7.9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions 7 - 34 7.9.1 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP3/FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34 7.9.2 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP-L (instruction format)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36 7.9.3 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP-L (start conditions format)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 39 7.10 Setting Block Information 7 - 41 7.11 Displaying SFC Block List 7 - 43 7.12 A - 10 7.11.1 Creating blocks with SFC block list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 44 7.11.2 Copying/pasting blocks on SFC block list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 44 7.11.3 Displaying comments on SFC block list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 45 7.11.4 Displaying devices on SFC block list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 46 7.11.5 Displaying SFC diagram from SFC block list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 46 7.11.6 Displaying Local Label Setting screen from SFC block list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 46 Setting Parameters for SFC Programs 7 - 47 8 SFC settings in PLC parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 47 7.12.2 Setting the property of SFC programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 48 7.13 Considerations for Creating Programs in MELSAP-L 7 - 50 7.14 Changing T/C Setting Values 7 - 52 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8.1 8.2 9 7.12.1 Searching for and Replacing Data in Ladder Programs 8-2 8.1.1 Searching for devices/labels with simple search function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2 8.1.2 Moving to specified device/label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3 8.1.3 Jumping to specified step number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5 8.1.4 Changing the module start I/O numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6 Searching for and Replacing Data in SFC Programs 8-8 8.2.1 Jumping to specified SFC step number/transition number on SFC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8 8.2.2 Searching for jump with step number on SFC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9 8.2.3 Jumping to specified SFC step number/block number on SFC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10 8.2.4 Replacing SFC step number on SFC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11 8.2.5 Searching for blocks on SFC block list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12 8.2.6 Searching for devices on SFC block list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.1 Editing Device Comments 9-2 9.2 Editing Statements and Notes 9-2 9.2.1 Statements and notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2 9.2.2 Entering statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4 9.2.3 Modifying and deleting statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7 9.2.4 Entering notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9 9.2.5 Modifying and deleting notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11 9.3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes 9 - 13 9.4 Changing the Type (PLC/Peripheral) of Statement/Note 9 - 21 9.5 Displaying Line Statements on Tree View 9 - 22 9.5.1 Line statements on tree view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22 9.5.2 Displaying line statements on tree view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 23 9.5.3 Disabling setting of line statements on tree view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24 9.5.4 Moving ladder blocks on tree view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 25 9.5.5 Deleting ladder blocks on tree view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 26 9.6 Jumping from Line Statement List 9 - 27 9.7 Merge Process when Reading Programs from Programmable Controller CPU 9 - 28 9.8 9.7.1 Merge process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 28 9.7.2 Performing merge process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 29 Editing SFC Comments 9 - 30 A - 11 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 For Projects without Labels 10.1.1 Converting created programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 10.1.2 Converting all programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 10.1.3 Executing online program change simultaneously with ladder conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3 10.1.4 Converting only one block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 3 10.1.5 Checking programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4 For Projects with Labels 10 - 5 10.2.1 Converting/compiling created programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5 10.2.2 Compiling all programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7 10.2.3 Executing online program change simultaneously with conversion/compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 10.2.4 Changing operating conditions of compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8 Compilation 10 - 11 10.3.1 Compilation target data when compiling all programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11 10.3.2 Assigning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12 10.3.3 Considerations of compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15 Checking for Errors and Warnings 10.4.1 11 10 - 2 10 - 19 Correcting errors and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11.1 12 Writing/Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU 11 - 2 MONITORING 12.1 Starting and Stopping Monitoring Programs 12 - 2 12.2 Changing Display Conditions of Monitoring 12 - 3 12.2.1 12.3 12.4 12.5 A - 12 Changing current value display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of word type variable . . . . . . . . 12 - 3 12.2.2 Monitoring buffer memory and link memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 4 12.2.3 Switching to FXGP(DOS)/ FXGP(WIN) display format (FXCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 5 Monitoring Ladder Programs 12 - 6 12.3.1 Monitoring ladder programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 6 12.3.2 Monitoring programs with reference window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 9 12.3.3 Monitoring registered ladder blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 11 Monitoring SFC Programs 12 - 13 12.4.1 Monitoring SFC diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 13 12.4.2 Monitoring transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 16 12.4.3 Monitoring operation outputs and transition conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 17 12.4.4 Batch monitoring all blocks, monitoring active steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 18 12.4.5 Monitoring SFC block list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 20 Setting monitor condition/monitor stop condition 12 - 21 13 SETTING OPTIONS 13.1 Basic Operations 13 - 2 13.2 Option Setting List 13 - 3 APPENDIX Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys Appendix 1.1 App - 2 Common toolbars and shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 2 Appendix 1.2 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 4 Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 5 INDEX A - 13 MANUALS ■ Related manuals are separately issued according to the purpose of their functions in GX Works2. ● Related manuals The manuals related to this product are shown below. Refer to the following tables when ordering required manuals. 1) Manual name Manual number (Model code) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Explains the system configuration of GX Works2 and the functions common to Simple project and Structured project such as parameter setting, operation method for the online function. (Sold separately) SH-080779ENG (13JU63) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block) Explains methods for such as creating function blocks, pasting function blocks to sequence programs, and operating FB library in Simple project of GX Works2. (Sold separately) SH-080984ENG (13JU72) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) Explains methods for such as creating and monitoring programs in Structured project of GX Works2. (Sold separately) SH-080781ENG (13JU65) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module) Explains methods of intelligent function module for such as parameter setting, monitoring programs, and predefined protocol support function in GX Works2. (Sold separately) SH-080921ENG (13JU69) GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Simple Project) Explains fundamental methods for such as creating, editing, and monitoring programs in Simple project for users inexperienced with GX Works2 (Sold separately) SH-080787ENG (13JZ22) GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Structured Project) Explains fundamental methods for such as creating, editing, and monitoring programs in Structured project for users inexperienced with GX Works2. (Sold separately) SH-080788ENG (13JZ23) 2) A - 14 Operation of GX Works2 Structured Programming Manual name Manual number (Model code) MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual (Fundamentals) Explains the programming methods, types of programming languages, and other information required to create structured programs. (Sold separately) SH-080782ENG (13JW06) MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instructions) Explains the specifications and functions of common instructions such as sequence instructions, basic instructions, and application instructions, that can be used in structured programs. (Sold separately) SH-080783ENG (13JW07) MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Application Functions) Explains the specifications and functions of application functions that can be used in structured programs. (Sold separately) SH-080784ENG (13JW08) MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Special Instructions) Explains the specifications and functions of special instructions such as module dedicated instruction, PID control instruction, and built-in I/O function dedicated instruction, that can be used in structured programs. (Sold separately) SH-080785ENG (13JW09) FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Device & Common] Explains the devices and parameters provided in GX Works2 for structured programming. (Sold separately) JY997D26001 (09R925) FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Basic & Applied Instruction] Explains the sequence instructions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming. (Sold separately) JY997D34701 (09R926) FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Application Functions] Explains the application functions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming. (Sold separately) JY997D34801 (09R927) 3) Operation of iQ Works Manual name Manual number (Model code) iQ Works Beginner's Manual Explains fundamental methods for such as managing the system using MELSOFT Navigator and using system labels for users inexperienced with GX Works2. (Sold separately) SH-080902ENG (13JZ44) The Operating Manuals are included on the CD-ROM of the software package in a PDF file format. Manuals in printed form are sold separately for single purchase. Order a manual by quoting the manual number (model code) listed in the table above. A - 15 ● Purpose of this manual This manual explains the operations for creating sequence programs in Simple project using the functions supported by GX Works2. Manuals for reference are listed in the following table according to their purpose. For information such as the content and number of each manual, refer to the list of 'Related manuals'. 1) Installation of GX Works2 and USB driver Purpose GX Works2 Installation Instructions GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common Learning the operating environment and installation method Details Learning a USB driver installation method 2) Details Operation of GX Works2 GX Works2 Beginner's Manual Purpose Simple Project Structured Project Learning all functions of GX Works2 Learning the basic operations and operating procedures when creating a structured project for the first time Learning the operations of available functions regardless of project type. Learning the functions and operation methods for programming Learning the operations and operating procedures when creating function blocks (FB) in Simple project. Learning data setting methods for intelligent function module A - 16 Simple Project Common Function Block Structured Project Intelligent Function Module Outline Learning the project types and available languages in GX Works2 Learning the basic operations and operating procedures when creating a simple project for the first time GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Outline Details Details Details Outline Details Details Details Details 3) Operations in each programming language For details of instructions used in each programming language, refer to the section 4 and the section 5 on the following pages. Purpose Ladder Diagram Simple Project Sequential Function Chart GX Works2 Beginner's Manual Simple Project Structured Project Sequential Function Chart Structured Ladder /FBD Structured Text *1 : Structured Project Simple Project Structured Project Outline Details *1 Outline Details Outline Structured Text Ladder Diagram GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Details Outline Details *1 Outline Details Outline Details Outline Details MELSAP3 and FX series SFC only A - 17 4) Details of instructions in each programming language (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) Purpose MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual Fundamentals Common Special Application Instructions Instructions Functions Manual MELSEC-Q/L for MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming module Programming Manual to be Manual used Common Instruction Learning details of programmable controller CPU All error codes, languages special relays, and special registers Details Learning the types and details of common instructions Details Using Ladder Diagram PID Control Instructions - Learning the types and details of instructions for intelligent function modules Details Learning the types and details of instructions for network modules Details Learning the types and details of instructions for the PID control function Details Learning details Using of specifications, Sequential functions, and Function instructions of Chart SFC (MELSAP3) Learning the fundamentals for creating a structured program Learning the types and details of common instructions Learning the types and details Using of instructions for Structured intelligent Ladder/ function modules FBD or Structured Learning the types and details Text of instructions for network modules Learning the types and details of instructions for the PID control function Learning the types and details of application functions A - 18 SFC Details Details Details Outline Details Outline Details Details Outline Details 5) Details of instructions in each programming language (for FXCPU) Purpose MELSECQ/L/F Structured Programming Manual FXCPU Structured Programming Manual FX0,FX0S, FX0N,FX1, FXU,FX2C FX1S,FX1N, FX2N,FX1NC, FX2NC FX3G,FX3U, FX3GC,FX3UC Using Ladder Diagram Learning the types and details of basic/ application instructions, descriptions of devices and parameters Details Details Details Using Sequential Function Chart Learning details of specifications, functions, and instructions of SFC Details Details Details Fundamentals Learning the fundamentals for creating a structured program Using Structured Ladder/ FBD or Structured Text Learning the descriptions of devices, parameters, and error codes Learning the types and details of sequence instructions Learning the types and details of application instructions Device & Common Basic & Applied Instruction FXCPU Programming Manual Application Functions Details Details Details Details A - 19 ● How to read this manual Supported CPU Supported programmable controller CPUs are shown in icons under the section title. Screen display Describes the screen display procedure. Follow the and select [(menu)] to open the screen. *Screen display may differ depending on the CPU type. In that case, typical example is described. Chapter heading Index on the right of the page number clarifies the chapter of currently open page. Display contents Describes the display contents on the screen. Section title Clarifies the section of currently open page. Operating procedure Describes the operating procedure of the function. Reference location leads to the reference location and reference manual. Screen button Describes the buttons on the screen. A - 20 The following table explains the CPU module icons that indicate the function availability. Icon QCPU (Q mode) LCPU FXCPU Q CPU L CPU FX Q CPU - - Q CPU L CPU FX Description Normal icons indicate that the corresponding function is available. Icons with * (asterisk) symbol indicate that the corresponding function is available with restrictions such as CPU types. *1 Icons with × symbol indicate that the corresponding function is not available. This manual also uses the following columns: This indicates notes requiring attention or useful functions relating to the information given on the same page. Restrictions This indicates restrictions relating to the information given on the same page. ● Symbols used in this manual The following shows the symbols used in this manual with descriptions and examples. 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. Symbol [ Description ] (Underline) << >> "" Screen name Q Parameter Setting screen Tab name on a screen <<PLC System>> Item name on a screen "Timer Limit Setting" Button on a screen - [Project] Toolbar icon Menu name on a menu bar Example Keyboard key button A - 21 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ■ The following are the generic terms/abbreviations of such as software packages and programmable controller CPUs used in this manual. Generic term and abbreviation A - 22 Description GX Works2 Generic product name for SWnDNC-GXW2-E (n: version) GX Developer Generic product name for SWnD5C-GPPW-E, SWnD5C-GPPW-EA, SWnD5C-GPPW-EV, and SWnD5C-GPPW-EVA (n: version) MELSOFT Navigator Product name for the integrated development environment included in SWnDNC-IQWK (iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works) (n: version) iQ Works Abbreviation for iQ platform supporting engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works Personal computer Generic term for personal computers on which Windows® operates Basic model QCPU Generic term for Q00J, Q00, and Q01 High Performance Model QCPU Generic term for Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, and Q25H Process CPU Generic term for Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, and Q25PH Redundant CPU Generic term for Q12PRH and Q25PRH Universal model QCPU Generic term for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q03UDV, Q04UDH, Q04UDEH, Q04UDV, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH, Q06UDV, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q13UDV, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, Q26UDH, Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH High-speed Universal model QCPU Generic term for Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, and Q26UDV QCPU (Q mode) Generic term for Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, and Universal model QCPU LCPU Generic term for L02S, L02, L02-P, L06, L26, L26-BT, and L26-PBT FXCPU Generic term for FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC FXGP(WIN) Abbreviation for SW0PC-FXGP/WIN MELSAP3 Abbreviation for the SFC function in MELSAP3 display format MELSAP-L Generic term for the SFC function in MELSAP-L (instruction format) and MELSAP-L (start conditions format) SFC Generic term for MELSAP3, MELSAP-L, and FX series SFC ■ TERMS The following are the terms used in this manual. Term Description Execution program A compiled program created in a project with labels A program that can be executed on a programmable controller CPU Actual device An actual device assigned to label after compiling a project with labels, or a device that is not described using a label Common instruction Generic term for sequence instructions, basic instructions, application instructions, data link instructions, multiple CPU dedicated instructions, and multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedicated instructions Special instruction Generic term for module dedicated instructions, PID control instructions, socket communication function instructions, built-in I/O function instructions, and data logging function instructions Simple project Generic term for projects created using Ladder Diagram/Sequential Function Chart/Structured Text Without labels Generic term for projects created without selecting "Use Label" when creating new projects With labels Generic term for projects created with selecting "Use Label" when creating new projects Structured project Generic term for projects created using Ladder Diagram/Sequential Function Chart/Structured Text/Structured Ladder/FBD Project without labels Generic term for Simple projects that do not use labels Project with labels Generic term for Simple projects that use labels and Structured projects Project with security Generic term for projects whose securities are set List format An input format to input mnemonic language in a ladder program A - 23 MEMO A - 24 OVERVIEW 2 This manual describes the programming method using Simple project and the operation method of the related functions. For the features and functions of GX Works2, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) SCREEN CONFIGURATION 1 OVERVIEW 1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Features of Simple Project 1-2 1.3 List of Functions 1-4 5 SETTING LABELS 1.2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 1-2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS What is Simple Project? 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 1.1 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 1-1 GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW 1.1 What is Simple Project? The Simple project is used to create sequence programs using instructions for Mitsubishi programmable controller CPUs. Programs in Simple project can be created in a similar way with GX Developer. 1.2 Features of Simple Project This section explains the features of the Simple project. ■ Inheritance of operational performances and enhanced use of program assets GX Works2 inherits excellent operational performances from GX Developer. GX Works2 GX Developer Therefore, GX Works2 can edit the sequence programs created by GX Developer, making it possible to utilize program assets effectively. ■ Program components using function blocks The function blocks can be used to convert and register ladder blocks that are used repeatedly as components. Therefore, registered ladder blocks can be easily utilized when creating sequence programs. Function blocks can be used only for a project with labels. For details of method for using function blocks, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block) 1-2 1.2 Features of Simple Project 1 ST program editing on ladder editor ST programs can be edited/monitored on the ladder editor by using the Inline structured text function. The Inline structured text function can be used only for a project with labels. OVERVIEW ■ SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 1-3 GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW 1.3 List of Functions This section shows the list of functions to create programs using Ladder Diagram and Sequential Function Chart. For all the functions of GX Works2, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) For (Common) and (FB) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals respectively: (Common) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) (FB) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block) 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project This section explains the functions common to Simple project and Structured project. List of common functions ■ The following tables show functions that are available regardless of the type of editing or setting target. Project (common function) Object - New Add data to the project. Rename Rename the selected data. Delete Delete the selected data. Copy Copy the selected data. Paste Paste the copied data. Set as Default Connection Specify data in selected connection destination as a connection destination for regular use. Property Display the selected data properties. Library (Common) - Install Import an FB library to the project. Edit (common function) Undo Restore the previous processing status. Redo Restore the processing deleted with [Undo]. Cut Cut the selected data. Copy Copy the selected data. Paste Paste the cut or copied data at the cursor position. Compile (common function) 1-4 Reference Build Convert/compile a program being edited. Online Program Change Write sequence programs to a programmable controller CPU after the conversion/compilation. Rebuild All Convert/compile all programs in the project. 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project (FB) Reference - Reference Section 10.1.1 Section 10.2.1 (Common) Section 10.1.2 Section 10.2.2 1.3 List of Functions View (common function) 1 - Output Display/hide the Output window. The conversion (compilation) result is displayed. Online (common function) Read from PLC Read data from the programmable controller CPU. Write to PLC Write data to the programmable controller CPU. Monitor (Common) (FB) OVERVIEW Element Selection Display/hide the Function Block Selection window. Select a part such as function block and function on the window for utilizing it to a program. Section 10.4 2 Reference Section 11.1 - Monitor Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor Mode" during monitoring. Monitor (Write Mode) Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor (Write Mode)" during monitoring. Start Monitoring (All Windows) Start monitoring the programs of all open windows. Stop Monitoring (All Windows) Stop monitoring the programs of all open windows. Start monitoring the program of the open window. Stop Monitoring Stop monitoring the program of the open window. Change Value Format (Decimal) Display the current device value in decimal in program monitoring. Change Value Format (Hexadecimal) Display the current device value in hexadecimal in program monitoring. (Common) Section 12.1 3 4 Section 12.3.1 Change Instance (Function Block) Select an instance of the function block to be monitored. SFC All Block Batch Monitoring Batch monitor all blocks in the SFC program. Section 12.4.4 SFC Auto Scroll Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when they are out of the screen during monitoring. Section 12.4.1 5 Reference SETTING LABELS Start Monitoring Section 6.1.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Display/hide the Navigation window. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Navigation Tool (common function) (FB) PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Docking Window Reference Check Program Check programs of the project without labels and display errors. Check Device Duplication of Global Label Check duplications of devices assigned to global labels, and display the result. Section 5.7 Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting Set device range to be automatically assigned to a label. Section 5.8 Options Set various options. Chapter 13 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Section 10.1.5 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1-5 GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW ■ List of functions for setting labels The following table shows the functions for setting and editing labels. Edit (function for label setting) Delete Delete the selected data. Select All Select all items. New Declaration (Before) Add a row above the cursor position. New Declaration (After) Add a row below the cursor position. Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor position. Read from CSV File Read label settings from the CSV file. Write to CSV File Write label settings to the CSV file. System Label Reference - Section 5.5.5 Section 5.9 - Reservation to Register System Label Reserve the selected global label for registration as a system label. Reservation to Release System Label Reserve the selected global label for deregistration of system label. Import System Label Import system label information and apply it to global labels. Reflect to System Label Database Apply the registration-reserved/deregistration-reserved global labels to the system label data base. Confirm Update of System Label Database Apply system label information changed in another project to global labels. Execute Verification Synchronous with System Label Resolve a mismatch when system label information contains it. Sort Section 5.2 - Class Label Name Data Type Constant Sort the labels in ascending/descending order with the selected item. Section 5.5.5 Extract and display unused labels. Extracted unused labels can be deleted in batch. Section 5.5.6 Device Comment Remark Unused label list 1-6 1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project 1.3 List of Functions Increment the device number of device in the cut/copied ladder block and paste it consecutively. Delete Delete the selected data. Restore After Ladder Conversion Return the ladder program being edited to the last converted status. Insert Row Insert a row at the cursor position. Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor position. Insert Column Insert a column at the cursor position. Delete Column Delete the column at the cursor position. Section 6.11.4 Section 6.13 Section 6.9 NOP Batch Insert Insert an NOP in front of the ladder block at the cursor position. NOP Batch Delete Batch-delete NOPs in the program being edited. Edit Line Enter a line at the cursor position. Section 6.6.1 Delete Line Delete the line at the cursor position. Section 6.8.1 Change TC Setting Batch-change timer/counter setting values used in the program. Section 6.15 Ladder Edit Mode Section 6.10 - Read Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode". Write Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode". Ladder Symbol Section 6.1.2 - Open Contact Insert at the cursor position. Close Contact Insert at the cursor position. Open Branch Insert at the cursor position. Close Branch Insert at the cursor position. Coil Insert at the cursor position. Application Instruction Insert at the cursor position. Vertical Line Insert at the cursor position. Horizontal Line Insert at the cursor position. Delete Vertical Line Insert at the cursor position. Delete Horizontal Line Insert at the cursor position. Section 6.6.2 Section 6.8.2 Insert at the cursor position. Falling Pulse Insert at the cursor position. Rising Pulse Branch Insert at the cursor position. Falling Pulse Branch Insert at the cursor position. Rising Pulse Close Insert at the cursor position. Falling Pulse Close Insert at the cursor position. Rising Pulse Close Branch Insert at the cursor position. Falling Pulse Close Branch Insert at the cursor position. Invert Operation Results Insert at the cursor position. Operation Result Rising Pulse Insert at the cursor position. Operation Result Falling Pulse Insert at the cursor position. 5 6 7 Section 6.2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Rising Pulse 4 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS - 3 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Pulse Contact Symbol Section 6.2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Continuous Paste Reference PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Edit (function for editing in Ladder Diagram) PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS The following tables show the functions for editing with the ladder editor. OVERVIEW 1 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram SETTING LABELS 1.3.2 1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram 1-7 GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW Edit (function for editing in Ladder Diagram) Inline Structured Text - Insert Inline Structured Text Box Insert an inline structured text box. Display Template Insert a template corresponds to the instruction, function, or control syntax. Mark Template (Left) Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the left by selecting the menu each time. Mark Template (Right) Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the right by selecting the menu each time. Edit FB Instance Rename an FB instance name. Documentation Section 6.4.2 (Structured) (FB) - Device Comment Edit device comments. Statement Edit statements. Note Edit notes. Statement/Note Batch Edit Batch-edit the statements/notes in the program. Easy Edit (Common) Section 9.2 Section 9.3 - Connect Line to Right-Side Symbol Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the right of the cursor position. Connect Line to Left-Side Symbol Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the left of the cursor position. Enter/Delete HLine Rightward Enter/delete a line at the right of the cursor position. Enter/Delete HLine Leftward Enter/delete a line at the left of the cursor position. Enter/Delete VLine Downward Enter/delete a line at the downward of the cursor position. Enter/Delete VLine Upward Enter/delete a line at the upward of the cursor position. Switch Open/Close Contact Switch between an open contact and a closed contact. (Common) Switch Statement/Note Type Change the type of the statement/note. Section 9.4 Instruction Partial Edit Display the Enter Symbol screen in which the first argument is in the selected status. Section 6.2 Edit List for Ladder Block Display/edit the ladder block in list format. Section 6.2.8 Read from CSV File Read a list format program from a CSV file and display it as a ladder program. Section 6.16 Write to CSV File Write a ladder program to a CSV file in list format. Find/Replace (function for editing in Ladder Diagram) 1-8 Reference Change Module I/O No. Replace the start module I/O number of the buffer memory address instruction. Switch Statement/Note Type Change the type (PLC/Peripheral) of a statement/note. Line Statement List Display a list of line statements used in the program. Jump Move the cursor to the specified step position. Jump to Next Ladder Block Start Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the next ladder block. Jump to Previous Ladder Block Start Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the previous ladder block. Next Device Move the cursor to the same device as the one at the cursor position. Next Contact Move the cursor to the contact where the same device as the one at the cursor position is used. Next Coil Move the cursor to the coil where the same device as the one at the cursor position is used. Back Return the cursor to the previous position before the [Next Device]/ [Next Contact]/[Next Coil] function execution. 1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram Section 6.6 Reference Section 8.1.4 Section 9.4 Section 9.6 Section 8.1.3 Section 6.5 Section 8.1.2 1.3 List of Functions Display device comments or label comments. Statement Display statements. Note Display notes. Display Lines of Monitored Current Value Open the Options screen and display/hide the lines of monitored current value. Section 2.2.5 Display Format for Device Comment Open the Options screen and set the display format for device comment. Section 2.2.6 - Display the hidden ladder block at the cursor position. Hide All Ladder Block Hide all ladder blocks. Display All Ladder Block Display all hidden ladder blocks. Device Display Section 2.2.11 3 - Device Display Display the device assigned by compilation. Batch Device Display Batch-change the label display on the program editors to the device display. Cancel All Device Display Cancel the device display on the program editors, and display data in the format at the time of data entry. Section 2.2.8 Display Compile Result Display the compilation result of the program on the inline structured text box in a list format. Section 6.4.3 Zoom Change the display magnification of the ladder program. Section 2.2.2 Text Size - Bigger Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen. Smaller Reduce the text display size on the editing screen. Open Other Windows Section 2.2.3 - Open Reference Window Open the reference window of the ladder editor. Update Reference Window Apply the most recent ladder program to the reference window. Open Reference Source Window Display the source ladder editor of the reference window. Tile FB Horizontally Tile the ladder editor and the function block program editor horizontally. Open Label Setting Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being edited. Back to Zoom SFC Block Display the SFC diagram of the Zoom editor window. Move SFC Cursor Section 12.3.2 (FB) Section 6.2.6 - Up Move the cursor on the SFC diagram upward. Down Move the cursor on the SFC diagram downward. Left Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the left. Right Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the right. Display the Instruction Help screen. Open Instruction Help Online (function for editing in Ladder Diagram) Monitor Set a condition to start monitoring. Monitor Stop Condition Setting Set a condition to stop monitoring. Entry Ladder Monitor Register and monitor ladder blocks. Delete All Entry Ladder Delete all registered ladder blocks. 4 5 6 Section 2.3.1 Section 6.2.2 Reference - Monitor Condition Setting PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Display Ladder Block PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Hide the ladder block at the cursor position. SETTING LABELS Hide Ladder Block 2 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Display Ladder Block Section 2.2.4 OVERVIEW Comment 1 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Reference 7 Section 12.3.2 Section 12.3.3 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS View (function for editing in Ladder Diagram) SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram 1-9 GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW 1.3.3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams The following tables show the functions for editing SFC diagrams. Edit (function for editing SFC diagrams) Delete Delete the selected data. Arrange SFC Redisplay the SFC diagram. Insert Row Insert a row at the cursor position. Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor position. Insert Column Insert a column at the cursor position. Delete Column Delete the column at the cursor position. Edit Line Insert at the cursor position. Selection Divergence Insert at the cursor position. Simultaneous Divergence Insert at the cursor position. Selection Convergence Insert at the cursor position. Simultaneous Convergence Insert at the cursor position. Delete Line Delete the line at the cursor position. Change TC Setting Batch-change timer/counter setting values used in the program. Ladder Edit Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode". Write Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode". SFC Step Attribute Section 7.3.10 Section 6.15 Section 6.1.2 - No Attribute Set the step attribute to No Attribute. Stored Coil Set the step attribute to Stored Coil. Stored Operation (without Transition Check) Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (SE). Stored Operation (with Transition Check) Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (ST). Reset Reset the step attribute. SFC Symbol Section 7.5 Insert at the cursor position. Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.1 Section 7.3.2 [BS] Block Start Step (without END Check) Insert at the cursor position. [JUMP] Jump Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.8 [END] END Step Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.9 [DUMMY] Dummy Step Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.1 [TR] Transition Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.3 [--D] Selection Divergence Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.4 [==D] Simultaneous Divergence Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.5 [--C] Selection Convergence Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.6 [==C] Simultaneous Convergence Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.7 [ | ] Vertical Line Insert at the cursor position. - Sort SFC Step No. Sort the SFC step/transition numbers in ascending/descending order. Documentation SFC Step/Transition Comment 1 - 10 Section 7.3.11 - Read Mode [B] Block Start Step (with END Check) Section 7.8 - Vertical Line Segment [STEP] Step Reference Section 7.7 - Change to the SFC step/transition comment editing mode. 1.3.3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams Section 9.8 1.3 List of Functions Move to the jump source step. Section 8.2.2 Change SFC Step No. Replace the SFC step number. Section 8.2.4 Compile (function for editing SFC diagrams) Convert Block Convert a single block. View (function for editing SFC diagrams) Reference Section 10.1.4 Reference Program Display Display MELSAP-L programs. Section 2.3.4 SFC Step/Transition Comment Display the SFC step/transition comments. Section 2.3.5 Zoom Change the display magnification ratio of the SFC diagram. Section 2.3.2 Text Size - Bigger Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen. Smaller Reduce the text display size on the editing screen. SFC Row Setting Section 2.3.3 Set the number of rows of SFC diagram. Section 2.3.6 Open SFC Blocklist Display the SFC block list screen. Section 7.11 MELSAP3 Display Display SFC in MELSAP3 format. MELSAP-L (Instruction Format) Display Display SFC in MELSAP-L (instruction format). MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format) Display Display SFC in MELSAP-L (start conditions format). Open Zoom/Start Destination Block Display the Zoom editor window or the start destination block. Back to Start SFC Block Display the SFC block of the start source. Open Header Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being edited. Online (function for editing in SFC diagrams) Monitor Set a condition to start monitoring. Monitor Stop Condition Setting Set a condition to stop monitoring. 3 4 Section 7.9 - Reference - Monitor Condition Setting 1.3.4 Section 2.3.7 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Find Jump Step OVERVIEW Section 8.2.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Move the cursor to the specified position. 1 Section 12.3.2 List of functions for editing SFC block list PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Jump Reference 5 SETTING LABELS Find/Replace (function for editing SFC diagrams) Find/Replace (function for editing SFC block list) Reference Jump Move the cursor to the specified block number. Section 8.2.5 Block Information Find Device Search for a device. Section 8.2.6 View (function for editing SFC block list) Reference SFC Block List Comment Display comments of the SFC block list. Section 7.11.3 Device Display Display devices. Section 7.11.4 Open SFC Body Open the SFC diagram. Section 7.11.5 Open Header Display the label setting editor. Section 7.11.6 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS The following tables show the functions for editing SFC block list. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 1.3.4 List of functions for editing SFC block list 1 - 11 GX Works2 1 OVERVIEW MEMO 1 - 12 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 OVERVIEW 1 This chapter explains the screen configuration of GX Works2. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 2.1 Overview of Screen Configuration 2-2 2.2 Ladder Editor 2-4 2.3 SFC Editor PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 2 - 18 SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 2-1 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.1 Overview of Screen Configuration Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains the main frame (basic screen) of GX Works2 that is displayed when it is started up. The following screen shows a main frame configuration on which a work window and docked windows are displayed. Screen display Title bar Menu bar Toolbar Function Block Selection window Navigation window Work window Docked window Status bar 2-2 2.1 Overview of Screen Configuration 1 Display contents Display tool buttons for executing each function. Work window A main screen used for operations such as programming, parameter setting, and monitoring. A sub screen to support operations performed on a work window. Navigation Display contents of a project in tree format. Selection Display a list of functions (such as function blocks) used for programming. Output Display compilation and check results (such as errors and warnings). Cross Reference Display cross reference results. Device List Display the device list. CC-Link Device Reference Display assignments of refresh devices and link devices specified for the CC-Link parameter. Watch 1 to 4 A screen used for monitoring and changing current device values. Intelligent Function Module Monitor 1 to 10 A screen used for monitoring intelligent function modules. Find/Replace A screen used for searching and replacing character strings in the project. Debug A screen used for setting the debug which uses the simulation function. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block) 2 3 Section 10.4 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) 4 5 SETTING LABELS Display information about a project being edited. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Status bar Appendix 1 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Docking window OVERVIEW Display menu options for executing each function. Toolbar - SCREEN CONFIGURATION Menu bar Reference PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Description Display a project name. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Name Title bar 2-3 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.2 Ladder Editor This section explains the screen display of the GX Works2 ladder editor and its basic operations. 2.2.1 Editing screen Q CPU L CPU FX The following explains the editing screen used for creating ladder programs. Screen display ● For a project without labels Select Project view ⇒ "POU" ⇒ "Program" ⇒ "(program)". ● For a project with labels Select Project view ⇒ "POU" ⇒ "Program" ⇒ "(program)" ⇒ "Program". Title bar Inline structured text box Step number END line Cursor Right power rail Left power rail Display contents Name Title bar Step number Display a start step number of the ladder block. Inline structured text box An area for editing ST programs on the ladder editor in a project with labels. (Section 6.4) Cursor Data at the cursor position are edited. Left power rail Right power rail END line 2-4 Description Display a data type, data name, and/or other information of the open data. 2.2.1 Editing screen Power rails of ladder programs. Indicate the end of a ladder program. Programs cannot be created beyond the END line. 2.2 Ladder Editor ■ 1 Displaying title bar Description Nesting number of master control Display a nesting number when the cursor position is on the nesting of master control. Data type Display a data type of data being open. Ladder editing mode Display the ladder editing mode. (Section 6.1.2) For when programs are monitored and for when programs are not monitored, "Monitoring" and "Stop Monitoring" are appended respectively. When "Execute online change by Compile" is selected in the option setting, "R" is prefixed to the ladder editing mode. Data name Display a data name of data being open. Instance name Display an instance name when a program of FB instance is displayed on a program. Title Display when a title is set on the property. • When a write protection is set with the security setting • When a program is a device display (Section 2.2.8) • When the mode is switched to the read mode or the monitor mode with the ladder editing mode Display the number of steps of program. Display with the parentheses for the programs with function block or uncompiled status. Compilation status Display "*" when a program of project with labels is uncompiled. 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Number of steps <Title bar example of program> 5 <Title bar example of FB instance opened in a program> ■ Nesting number of master control When the cursor position is on the nesting of master control, the nesting number of master control is displayed on a title bar. The nesting number of innermost master control is displayed in a master control with nesting architecture. The following figure shows the range where the nesting number of master control is displayed. Display the nesting number N0. Range of master control N0 SETTING LABELS Read-only display 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Display in the following cases. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Item OVERVIEW The following items are displayed on a title bar. 7 Range of master control N1 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Display the nesting number N1. Display the nesting number N0. SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 2.2.1 Editing screen 2-5 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.2.2 Changing display size of editing screen Q CPU L CPU FX Change the display size of the open editing screen. Screen display Select [View] ⇒ [Zoom] ( ). Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. Item 2.2.3 Description 150%, 100%, 75%, 50% Change the display size according to the selected zoom ratio. Specify Change the display size according to the specified zoom ratio. (50 to 150%) Auto Adjust the width of the ladder program automatically to display whole rungs from the left power rail to the right power rail. Changing text size on editing screen Q CPU L CPU Change the text size displayed on the editing screen. Operating procedure • Select [View] ⇒ [Text Size] ⇒ [Bigger]/[Smaller]. The change is applied to all ladder editors currently opened. The text size is changed one step at each setting within the range of 11 steps. ● When enlarging the text display size A typographic error may occur when enlarging the text display size. When the error occurs, adjust the text display size. 2-6 2.2.2 Changing display size of editing screen FX 2.2 Ladder Editor Q CPU L CPU FX Display/hide device comments (label comments), notes, and statements. 2 Operating procedure • OVERVIEW 1 Displaying/hiding comments Select [View] ⇒ [Comment]/[Statement]/[Note]. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ● Displaying/hiding comments Comments also can be displayed/hidden by selecting the item(s) on the Options screen displayed by the following operation. Select [View] ⇒ [Display Format for Device Comment]. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.2.4 2.2.5 Displaying/hiding areas for monitored current values Q CPU L CPU FX Display the dashed-line areas (areas for monitored current values). 6 Hide EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Display Hide the dashed-line areas (areas for monitored current values). (The areas are closed up.) Operating procedure 7 Select [View] ⇒ [Display Lines of Monitored Current Value]. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS The Options screen is displayed. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE • 5 SETTING LABELS Display/hide the areas for monitored current values of word type variables. By hiding the areas for monitored current values, the number of rows displayed on a single screen is increased, and therefore, a larger number of rows can be checked. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 2.2.4 Displaying/hiding comments 2-7 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.2.6 Setting number of rows and columns for displayed comments Q CPU L CPU Set the number of rows and columns for displayed a device comment using the option setting. Screen display Select [View] ⇒ [Display Format for Device Comment]. Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. Item Set the number of display rows in the range from 1 to 4 rows. Column Set the number of display columns to 5 or 8 columns. Example: 2-8 Description Row 4 rows × 8 columns 2 rows × 5 columns 2.2.6 Setting number of rows and columns for displayed comments FX 2.2 Ladder Editor 1 Setting number of contacts to be displayed on ladder programs Q CPU L CPU FX 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Set the number of contacts to be displayed on a single rung using the option setting. The default setting is 11 contacts. OVERVIEW 2.2.7 Screen display Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram". PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Operating procedure Set the item on the screen. Item Description 4 Select the number of contacts to be displayed on a single rung. • 11 contacts • 13 contacts • 17 contacts • 21 contacts SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Display Connection of Ladder Diagram PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS • 9 contacts 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE • 2.2.7 Setting number of contacts to be displayed on ladder programs 2-9 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION ● Considerations when changing the number of contacts to be displayed When the number of contacts is changed from the one used to create a ladder program to a less number of contacts, the program is not displayed properly in the following conditions. In this case, set the number of contacts back to the original setting. • When an instruction cannot be placed in the input circuit or output circuit of function block. • When the number of rows for a single ladder block exceeds 24. The following is an example of program in which instructions cannot be placed at the input circuit of function block when a program created with 17 contacts is changed to 11 contacts. < Display with 17 contacts > < Display with 11 contacts > ● Ladder program with 13 contacts or more The selection of 13 contacts or more is available from GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later. When using GX Developer concurrently or using GX Works2 Version 1.43V or earlier, change the setting as follows: • set the same setting as the product running concurrently for "Display Connection of Ladder Diagram" in the option setting. • for a program with 13 contacts or more, adjust the program for number of contacts to be 11 or less. 2 - 10 2.2.7 Setting number of contacts to be displayed on ladder programs 2.2 Ladder Editor ■ Setting number of contacts to be displayed on the Zoom editor window 1 OVERVIEW Set the number of contacts to be displayed on a single rung using the option setting. Screen display Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "Zoom". SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 Operating procedure 3 Set the item on the screen. Description PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Item Select the number of contacts to be displayed on a single rung. • Same as Ladder Diagram setting*1 • 5 contacts Number of Action/Transition Contacts • 9 contacts • 11 contacts 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS • 13 contacts • 17 contacts • 21 contacts The number of contacts to be displayed is set according to the setting for Ladder Diagram. SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS *1 : 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE • 2.2.7 Setting number of contacts to be displayed on ladder programs 2 - 11 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.2.8 Switching display between label names and devices Q CPU L CPU FX Switch the display of a program that uses labels between label name display and device display. If label comments or device comments are set, the corresponding comments are displayed. Devices assigned by the compilation can be checked by switching the program display from label name display to device display. For FXCPU, when a block password with the validated setting for "Read-protect the execution program" exists, the device display cannot be executed. For displaying label names and devices simultaneously, refer to Section 2.2.9. Operating procedure • Select [View] ⇒ [Device Display] ⇒ [Device Display] ( Example: Label name display ). Device display ● Displaying/hiding label comments and device comments To check the set label comments and device comments, set the setting to display comments. (Section 2.2.4) ■ Changing display of all program editors to device display in batch Change the display of all currently-opened program editors to the device display. Operating procedure • Select [View] ⇒ [Device Display] ⇒ [Batch Device Display]. The display of all currently-opened program editors (except for ST) is changed to the device display. ■ Canceling device display of all program editors Cancel the device display of all currently-opened program editors. Operating procedure • Select [View] ⇒ [Device Display] ⇒ [Cancel All Device Display]. The device display of all program editors is canceled and data are displayed in the format at the time of data entry. 2 - 12 2.2.8 Switching display between label names and devices 2.2 Ladder Editor Q CPU L CPU FX Change the view mode to display the labels and devices simultaneously by setting the option. OVERVIEW 1 Displaying labels and devices simultaneously 2 Operating procedure 1. Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram". 2. Select "Display labels and devices". The devices assigned to labels are displayed. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.2.9 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE <Display labels> <Display labels and devices> 5 SETTING LABELS ● Devices not to be displayed The devices are not displayed in the following cases even the option is set. • When the program is never compiled • When the labels are used for array element • When structure labels are used When a label is used for the second argument in the Timer/ Counter/Retentive Timer instruction, the device of the second argument is not displayed simultaneously. ● Edit and find/replace when the labels and devices are displayed simultaneously When the labels and devices are displayed simultaneously, only labels can be the target of edit and find/replace. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 2.2.9 Displaying labels and devices simultaneously 2 - 13 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.2.10 Setting display content of tooltips Q CPU L CPU FX Content defined on the label setting editor is displayed as tooltip by placing the cursor on a label name on the program editor. Content excluding label names displayed on the tooltips can be set by the following operation. Operating procedure 1. Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder/SFC" ⇒ "Tool Hint". 2. Set the following items. Item Description Monitored value Display a monitoring result. When the labels are used for array element, or when the elements are not specified for array or structure, the monitoring values are not displayed. (Displayed only during monitoring) Class Display a label class. VAR_GLOBAL Device Display a device or a device assigned to the label. X1 Device comment Display a device comment. Device comments of devices assigned to labels are not displayed. X1 comment Data type Display a data type of the label. Bit Constant value Display a constant value of the label. FALSE Label comment Display label comments. GLOBAL1 comment Remark Display a remark of the label. (Global labels only) GLOBAL1 remark Single line Display tool tips in a single line. Multiple lines Display tool tips in multiple lines. Tool hint display items Tool hint display format Example <Single line> <Multiple lines> ● Displaying constant values The constant values of tooltip are displayed when "VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT" or VAR_CONSTANT is selected for "Class" of label. Note that the constant values are not displayed for function block labels. 2 - 14 2.2.10 Setting display content of tooltips 2.2 Ladder Editor 1 Hiding ladder blocks Q CPU L CPU FX Hide converted ladder blocks. If statements are set to ladder blocks, they are remained displayed while ladder blocks are hidden. OVERVIEW 2.2.11 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Hiding ladder blocks ■ 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Hide ladder blocks. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the ladder block to be hidden. SETTING LABELS 5 Select [View] ⇒ [Display Ladder Block] ⇒ [Hide Ladder Block]. The ladder block is hidden. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 2. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 2.2.11 Hiding ladder blocks 2 - 15 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Displaying hidden ladder blocks ■ Display hidden ladder blocks. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor on the gray line of the hidden ladder block. 2. Select [View] ⇒ [Display Ladder Block] ⇒ [Display Ladder Block]. The hidden ladder block is displayed. ● Displaying/hiding ladder blocks • Multiple ladder blocks can be selected to display/hide. • All ladder blocks are displayed/hidden by selecting [View] ⇒ [Display Ladder Block] ⇒ [Display All Ladder Block]/ [Hide All Ladder Block]. • Ladder blocks can also be displayed/hidden by right-clicking and selecting [Display Ladder Block]/[Hide Ladder Block] from the shortcut menu. • A hidden ladder block can be displayed by double-clicking the gray line of the hidden ladder block. 2 - 16 2.2.11 Hiding ladder blocks 2.2 Ladder Editor Displaying step ladder (STL) instruction in contact format Q CPU L CPU FX For FXCPU projects without labels, whether to display step ladder instructions in contact format can be selected by setting the option. 1 OVERVIEW 2.2.12 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Screen display Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram". Example: 3 When the item is not selected PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Start of step ladder *1 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 State S0 5 SETTING LABELS End of step ladder When the item is selected Start of step ladder EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 End of step ladder When entering the coil instruction after entering the STL instruction, do not enter a coil within the area with the dotted line. (A ladder program to which a contact is entered cannot be displayed in this method.) When entering contacts, enter them from the power rail. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE *1: 2.2.12 Displaying step ladder (STL) instruction in contact format 2 - 17 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.3 SFC Editor Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains the screen display of the SFC editor and its basic operations. 2.3.1 Editing screen The following explains the editing screen used for creating SFC diagrams. A display format can be selected for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU. Select MELSAP3 to edit operation output and transition condition programs on the Zoom editor window. Select MELSAP-L (instruction format) or MELSAP-L (start conditions format) to edit operation output and transition condition programs on the SFC editor window. For switching the display format, refer to Section 2.3.7. Screen display Select Project view ⇒ "POU" ⇒ "Program" ⇒ "(program)" ⇒ "(block)" ⇒ "Program". <MELSAP3/FXCPU> SFC editor window Zoom editor window Display contents Item 2 - 18 Description SFC editor window Used to edit SFC diagrams. Zoom editor window Used to edit operation output and transition condition programs. 2.3.1 Editing screen 2.3 SFC Editor The window display operations of the SFC editor window and the Zoom editor window can be linked. Operating procedure • Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "SFC 1" ⇒ "Tile SFC and ZOOM vertically". 4 5 SETTING LABELS ● Positioning When the SFC editor window is moved, the Zoom editor window corresponds to the selected SFC diagram moves simultaneously. In a similar way, when the Zoom editor window is moved, the corresponding SFC editor window moves simultaneously. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Displaying SFC editor window and Zoom editor window side by side PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS ■ 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION ● Displaying SFC editor window and Zoom editor window By the following setting, the Zoom editor window can be automatically displayed side by side when the SFC editor window is opened. The display of SFC editor and Zoom editor can be selected from Tiling Horizontally or Tiling Vertically. Select "Tile SFC and Zoom vertically" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "SFC 1". When this setting is valid, the setting of "Open Zoom with New Window" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "Zoom" becomes invalidated. ● Moving the cursor of the SFC editor window on the Zoom editor window With the activated Zoom editor window, the cursor of the SFC editor window can be moved. Select the direction to move the cursor by selecting [View] ⇒ [Move SFC Cursor] ⇒ [Up] / [Down] / [Left] / [Right] ( + + / / / ). When the cursor of the SFC editor window is moved, the cursor of the Zoom editor window moves to the corresponding position. OVERVIEW 1 When the SFC editor window is moved downward, the corresponding Zoom editor window moves simultaneously. 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS ● Resizing Dragging the boundary of the SFC editor window and the Zoom editor window changes the size of the windows. When the size of one of the windows is enlarged, the size of the other window is reduced. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 8 The sizes of the windows are changed. SEARCH AND REPLACE Drag the boundary of the SFC editor window and the Zoom editor window to the right. 2.3.1 Editing screen 2 - 19 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Restrictions ● Displaying the SFC editor window and the Zoom window When executing the following operation, the SFC editor window and the Zoom editor window may not be displayed on the top at the same time, or either of the windows may be moved behind another window. • Switching windows by pressing the + keys, the + + keys, or the + keys. • Reopening the project after closing the project while the multiple SFC editor windows or the SFC editor window and other editors are cascaded. ● When Zoom editor window is hidden When executing the following operation, the Zoom editor window may be hidden. • Deleting an operation output/transition condition on the SFC editor window. • Pasting a dummy step on the SFC editor window. • Reopening the project after closing the project while the cursor is at the position other than the operation output/ transition condition on the SFC editor window. ● When the performance on the editor window is slow When executing the following operation, the performance on the editor window may be slow. • Minimizing the SFC editor window and minimizing the Zoom editor window as well. • Switching windows by pressing the + keys or the + + keys or the switching order does not match with that of displayed tab. ● When multiple windows are open When the number of open windows exceeds the maximum while opening a project saved with GX Works2 Version 1.87R or earlier, the message "Number of opening windows are too much. Please close needless window." may be displayed. 2 - 20 2.3.1 Editing screen 2.3 SFC Editor ■ 1 SFC editor window OVERVIEW The following explains the screen for editing an SFC diagram. ● MELSAP3/FXCPU Column number 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION SFC step comment PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Transition comment SFC step number 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Reset destination step number Start destination block number Transition number SETTING LABELS 5 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Jump destination step number Row number EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 2.3.1 Editing screen 2 - 21 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION ● MELSAP-L (instruction format) Column number SFC step comment Start destination block number Program Transition comment Reset destination step number SFC step number Transition number Jump destination step number Row number 2 - 22 2.3.1 Editing screen 2.3 SFC Editor 1 ● MELSAP-L (start conditions format) OVERVIEW Column number SFC step comment Start destination block number Reset destination step number SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Transition comment SFC step number PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Transition number Program Row number Display contents Description Display row numbers on the SFC diagram. Column number Display column numbers on the SFC diagram. SFC step number Display SFC step numbers for each step. Transition number Start destination block 6 Display transition numbers for each transition. number*1 Display start destination block numbers for the block start step. Display reset destination step numbers for the reset step. Jump destination step number Display jump destination step numbers for the jump step. SFC step comment Display comments for each SFC step. Transition comment*1 Display comments for each transition. Program Display MELSAP-L programs. 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Reset destination step number*1 Not supported by FXCPU. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE *1 : EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Item Row number 5 SETTING LABELS Jump destination step number 2.3.1 Editing screen 2 - 23 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.3.2 Changing display size of editing screen Change the display size of the editing screen. Screen display Select [View] ⇒ [Zoom] ( ). Display contents Item Description 150%, 100%, 75%, 50% Change the display size according to the selected zoom ratio. Specify Change the display size according to the specified zoom ratio. (50 to 150%) Auto Change the display size according to the specified number of columns. (1 to 10 columns) 2.3.3 Changing text size on editing screen Change the text size displayed on the editing screen. Operating procedure • Select [View] ⇒ [Text Size] ⇒ [Bigger]/[Smaller]. Change the text size displayed on the SFC diagrams. For MELSAP3 display, the text size is changed one step at each setting within the range of 7 steps. For MELSAP-L display, the text size is changed one step at each setting within the range of 3 steps. < MELSAP3/FXCPU > 2 - 24 2.3.2 Changing display size of editing screen 2.3 SFC Editor 2.3.4 1 Displaying MELSAP-L programs on SFC diagram OVERVIEW Display programs on the SFC diagram when editing in MELSAP-L. Operating procedure • 2 Select [View] ⇒ [Program Display] ( + + ). SCREEN CONFIGURATION Select the menu again to hide the programs. "?" marks are displayed for programs that cannot be displayed in MELSAP-L. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 2.3.5 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Displaying/hiding SFC step/transition comments Display/hide SFC step/transition comments on the created SFC diagram. 5 Select [View] ⇒ [SFC Step/Transition Comment] ( + ). Select the menu again to hide SFC step/transition comments. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE • SETTING LABELS Operating procedure 2.3.4 Displaying MELSAP-L programs on SFC diagram 2 - 25 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2.3.6 Setting number of columns for SFC diagram display Set the number of divergences that can be edited and displayed for the SFC diagram. Screen display Select [View] ⇒ [SFC Row Setting]. Operating procedure 1. Set the item on the screen. Item 2. Description Col Number Enter the number of columns. (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU: 1 to 32, FXCPU: 1 to 16) Line Number Display the number of rows. The value is changed automatically according to the specified number of columns. Click the button. The SFC diagram is displayed according to the specified number of columns. 2.3.7 Changing SFC display format Change the SFC display format. For Simple project, a display format can be selected for each program. For Structured project, a single display format is selected for a project. This function is not supported by FXCPU. ■ Displaying programs in MELSAP3 Set the SFC display format to MELSAP3. Operation • Select [View] ⇒ [MELSAP3 Display]. 2 - 26 2.3.6 Setting number of columns for SFC diagram display 2.3 SFC Editor ■ 1 Displaying programs in MELSAP-L (instruction format) OVERVIEW Set the SFC display format to MELSAP-L (instruction format). Operation • Select [View] ⇒ [MELSAP-L (Instruction Format) Display]. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 4 Displaying programs in MELSAP-L (start conditions format) PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS ■ Set the SFC display format to MELSAP-L (start conditions format). Operation • Select [View] ⇒ [MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format) Display]. SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 2.3.7 Changing SFC display format 2 - 27 GX Works2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION MEMO 2 - 28 SETTING LABELS Creating Programs EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 3.1 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 3-2 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 SEARCH AND REPLACE OVERVIEW PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE This chapter explains a procedure for creating programs in Simple project. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3-1 GX Works2 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3.1 Creating Programs Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains the general operating steps from the creation of a program in Simple project to the execution of the created program on the programmable controller CPU. Operating procedure 1. Creating a new project Procedure Reference Start up GX Works2. Create a new Simple project. To utilize an existing Simple project, open that Simple project. 2. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Setting parameters Procedure Reference Set parameters. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Check parameters. 3. Setting labels (when using labels) *1 Procedure Reference Define global labels. Chapter 5 Define local labels. *1 : 4. For FXCPU, a project with labels does not support Sequential Function Chart. Editing and converting/compiling programs (for ladder programs) Procedure Reference Edit ladder programs. Chapter 6 Convert programs. (For projects without labels) Check programs. (For projects without labels) Chapter 10 Compile a program, or compile all programs. (For projects with labels) (To the next page) 3-2 3.1 Creating Programs 1 Editing and converting/compiling programs (for SFC programs) Set properties of SFC programs and SFC blocks. Check programs. (For projects without labels) Compile a program, or compile all programs. (For projects with labels) Connect a personal computer to the programmable controller CPU. Set the connection destination. Reference GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Write sequence programs to the programmable controller CPU. 5 Reference Chapter 11 6 Procedure Monitor the execution status of sequence programs. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Checking the operation Reference Chapter 12 7 Ending the project Procedure Save the project. Exit GX Works2. 4 SETTING LABELS Write parameters to the programmable controller CPU. 9. 3 Writing data to the programmable controller CPU Procedure 8. Chapter 10 Connecting a personal computer to the programmable controller CPU Procedure 7. Chapter 7 Reference GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 6. Chapter 7, Chapter 10 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Edit transition condition programs and convert them. 2 Chapter 7 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Edit operation output programs and convert them. Reference PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Procedure Edit SFC diagrams. For FXCPU, enter a ladder block to turn ON the initial step. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 5. OVERVIEW (From the previous page) 3-3 GX Works2 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE MEMO 3-4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 4 OVERVIEW 1 This chapter explains the program configurations of Simple project. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4-2 SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Program Configurations of Simple Project 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 4.1 4-1 GX Works2 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4.1 Program Configurations of Simple Project Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains the configurations of Simple project that are displayed in a tree format on the Project view. The display contents differ according to the programmable controller type and the project type. The following is an example for QCPU (Q mode). For (Common) and (Intelligent) indicated as the reference, refer to the following manuals respectively: (Common) … (Common) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) (Intelligent) … (Intelligent) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module) < Simple project (without labels) > *1 (Common) (Intelligent) (Common) *2 Define the program execution type. (Common) Program configuration Define POUs. Program Write a program in the desired programming language. Line statement list *4 (Common) *1 *1 : For FXCPU, this item is not displayed. *2 : For FXCPU, no classification for program execution type. Only "Execution Program" is displayed. *3 : Chapter 6, Chapter 7 *4 : When "Tree Display" is set for a line statement list, the line statement list is displayed on a tree view. (Section 9.5.1) 4-2 *3 4.1 Program Configurations of Simple Project 1 < Simple project (with labels) > Define labels shared among POUs. OVERVIEW *1 (Common) (Intelligent) (Common) *4 *2, *3 (Common) Program configuration Define POUs. Program Write a program in the desired programming language. *6 Define labels. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Define the program execution type. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 *5 Line statement list PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 *7 Function block (FB) (Common) *1 : For FXCPU, this item is not displayed. *2 : For FXCPU, no classification for program execution type. Only "Execution Program" is displayed. *3 : For FXCPU Simple projects (with labels), "Execution Program" can be divided into multiple programs. 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS *1 5 *5 SETTING LABELS Write a program in the desired programming language. *8 Define labels. *9 Define structures. Section 5.2 *5 : Chapter 6, Chapter 7 *6 : Section 5.3 *7 : When "Tree Display" is set for a line statement list, the line statement list is displayed on a tree view. (Section 9.5.1) *8 : Section 5.4 *9 : Section 5.6 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE *4 : EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 4-3 GX Works2 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS MEMO 4-4 SETTING LABELS 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 5 OVERVIEW 1 This chapter explains how to set labels. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 5.1 The Type of Label Setting Editor 5-2 5.2 Setting Global Labels 5-3 5.3 Setting Local Labels for Programs 5-8 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 5.4 Setting Local Labels for Function Blocks 5 - 10 5 5.5 Common Operations for Setting Labels 5 - 12 5.6 Setting Structure Labels 5 - 23 5.7 Checking Duplications of Devices Assigned to Global Labels SETTING LABELS 5 - 29 6 5.8 Setting Ranges for Devices Assigned Automatically 5 - 30 5.9 Writing/Reading Data to/from CSV Files 5 - 33 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 4 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 5-1 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5.1 The Type of Label Setting Editor Q CPU L CPU FX This section shows label setting screens. When "Use Label" is selected on the New Project screen, labels are created as shown below. Labels are set on each screen according to the type of label. For FXCPU, a project with labels does not support Sequential Function Chart. Global Label Setting screen Define labels that can be used for all sequence programs in the project. ( *1) Local Label Setting screen Define labels that can be used only for each sequence program. ( *2) Function/FB Label Setting screen Define labels that can be used only for function blocks. ( Structure Setting screen Define structures to be used in the label setting. ( *4) *1 : Section 5.2 *2 : Section 5.3 *3 : Section 5.4 *4 : Section 5.6.1 5-2 *3) 5.2 Setting Global Labels Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to set global labels. Global labels can be used in iQ Works supported products (GX Works2, MT Developer2, GT Designer3) by registering them as system labels. For details of system labels, refer to the following manual. (iQ Works Beginner's Manual) OVERVIEW 1 Setting Global Labels SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 ● System labels Same label names can be used in programming among GX Works2, MT Developer2, and GT Designer3 by using system labels. ● System label data base A system label data base is a data base to manage system labels. A system label data base is created in the workspace when the workspace is saved in MELSOFT Navigator. System labels cannot be used in the workspace which does not contain a system label data base. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 5.2 4 Screen display PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Select Project view ⇒ "Global Label" ⇒ "(global label)". SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 5-3 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. Item Maximum number of characters Description Class Select a label class from the list displayed by clicking (Section 5.5.1) . Label Name Enter a desired label name. • Ladder/ST/SFC: 32 (FB instance name: 16) Data Type Specify a data type from the Data Type Selection screen displayed clicking . (Section 5.5.3) It can also be entered directly. 128 Constant Enter a constant value when "VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT" is selected 128 for "Class" and simple type is selected for "Data Type". - Set a specific device to be assigned to the label when "VAR_GLOBAL" is selected for "Class". Device • A device is automatically assigned when the cell is blank. • When the data type is structure, click the "Detail Setting" cell and set devices on the Structure Device Setting screen. (Section 5.6.3) 50 Comment*1, *2 Enter a label comment. Comments can be displayed on the program editor by switching display/hide of comments. (Section 2.2.4) 1024 Remark*1, *2 Enter supplementary information for label comments. This item is not displayed on the program editor. 1024 Displays the relation between the global label and system label. Class Relation with System Label*3 Disclose The global label is disclosed as a system label. Browse The global label refers the system label which is disclosed by another project. Blank There is no relation with a system label. - System Label Name*3 Displays the name of the system label which relates to the global label. - Attribute*3 Displays the attribute of the system label which relates to the global label. - *1 : *2 : *3 : 5-4 Description A new line can be inserted into a cell by pressing the + keys. The compilation is not necessary after editing. For FXCPU, these items are supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only. 5.2 Setting Global Labels (For FXCPU, this button is supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.) Reserves the selected global label for registration as a system label. ● (For FXCPU, this button is supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.) Reserves the selected global label for deregistration of system label. After the deregistration of the system label is confirmed, the global label becomes a normal global label. ● (For FXCPU, this button is supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.) Imports system labels to the project. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION ● OVERVIEW 1 Screen button 3 1. Click the PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Operating procedure button. The Import System Labels to Project screen is displayed. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 2. Select the check box(es) of "Select" of a system label to import to the project. 3. Click the 4. The following message is displayed. SETTING LABELS 5 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS button. 7 button. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Click the 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 5. 5-5 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS ● (For FXCPU, this button is supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.) Applies the registration-reserved/deregistration-reserved system label information to the system label data base, and confirm the registration/deregistration. Operating procedure 1. Click the button. The following message is displayed. 2. Click the button. The build and the save functions are performed automatically. 3. The Check before registering in system label database screen is displayed. 4. Confirm the registration information, and click the button. After the system label information is applied to the system label data base, the icon displayed on the Global Label Setting screen is updated to indicate the number of items that are not updated and the updated results as shown below. 5-6 5.2 Setting Global Labels When the button is clicked after registering, deregistering, or importing system labels, Online program change cannot be performed. • System labels whose "Attribute" is set to "Common" are not supported by LCPU. • System labels whose "Attribute" is set to "Common" or "Link" are not supported by FXCPU. • Importing system labels with MELSOFT Navigator may cause an error at compilation with GX Works2. Check the corresponding error location and correct the error as instructed by the error message displayed on the output window. SCREEN CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS • When performing Online program change, perform the function by selecting [Compile] ⇒ [Online Program Change] and then save the project. 2 5 SETTING LABELS ● Class setting When an item other than the class, such as a label name and data type, is set in a blank column, "VAR_GLOBAL" is automatically set for "Class". Change it if necessary. ● Characters that cannot be used for label names Any of the following label names causes an error at compilation. • A label name that includes a space. • A label name that begins with a numeral. • A label name which is same as the one used for devices. For characters that cannot be used for label names, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) ● Specifying devices/addresses The digit-specified bit device (K4M0) or bit-specified word device (D0.1) can be specified for devices/addresses. ● Specifying timer/counter devices When "Data Type" is a bit type, specified devices are treated as contacts (TS, STS, CS). When "Data Type" is a word type, specified devices are treated as current values (TN, STN, CN). ● Assigning devices automatically Devices are automatically assigned to labels which are not set devices when compiling a program. The device assignment range can be changed on the Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting screen. (Section 5.8) The assigned devices can be checked with the cross reference function. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) ● System label OVERVIEW 1 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 5-7 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5.3 Setting Local Labels for Programs Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to set local labels used for each program. Screen display Select Project view ⇒ "POU" ⇒ "Program" ⇒ "(program)" ⇒ "Local Label". Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. Item Maximum number of characters Description Class Select a label class from the list displayed by clicking (Section 5.5.1) . Label Name Enter a desired label name. • Ladder/ST/SFC: 32 (FB instance name: 16) Data Type Specify a data type from the Data Type Selection screen displayed clicking . (Section 5.5.3) It can also be entered directly. 128 Constant Enter a constant value when "VAR_CONSTANT" is selected for "Class" and simple type is selected for "Data Type". 128 Device This item cannot be set for local labels. When the data type is structure, click the "Detail Setting" cell and set devices on the Structure Device Setting screen. (Section 5.6.3) Enter a comment. Comment*1, *2 Comments can be displayed on the program editor by switching display/hide of comments. (Section 2.2.4) *1 : *2 : 5-8 A new line can be inserted in a cell by pressing the + keys. The compilation is not necessary after editing. - - 1024 5.3 Setting Local Labels for Programs SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ● Class setting When an item other than the class, such as a label name or data type, is set in a blank column, "VAR" is automatically set for "Class". Change it if necessary. ● Characters that cannot be used for label names Any of the following label names causes an error at compilation. • A label name that includes a space. • A label name that begins with a numeral. • A label name which is same as the one used for devices. For characters that cannot be used for label names, refer to the following manual. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) ● Assigning devices automatically Devices are automatically assigned to labels when a program is compiled. The device assignment range can be changed on the Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting screen. (Section 5.8) The assigned devices can be checked with the cross reference function. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) OVERVIEW 1 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 5-9 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5.4 Setting Local Labels for Function Blocks Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to set local labels for each function block. Create a new function block in advance. For the method for creating new function blocks, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Screen display Select Project view ⇒ "POU" ⇒ "FB_Pool" ⇒ "(function block)" ⇒ "Local Label". Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. Item Maximum number of characters Description Class Select a label class from the list displayed by clicking (Section 5.5.1) . Label Name Enter a desired label name. • Ladder/ST/SFC: 32 (Input/output label: 16) Data Type Specify a data type from the Data Type Selection screen displayed clicking . (Section 5.5.3) It can also be entered directly. 128 Constant Enter a constant value when "VAR_CONSTANT" is selected for "Class" and simple type is selected for "Data Type". 128 Enter a comment. Comment*1, *2 Comments can be displayed on the program editor by switching display/hide of comments. (Section 2.2.4) *1 : *2 : 5 - 10 A new line can be inserted in a cell by pressing the + keys. The compilation is not necessary after editing. - 1024 5.4 Setting Local Labels for Function Blocks The maximum number of input/output labels can be used in a function block differs according to programming languages. When setting input/output labels with local label setting of function block, set within the number of the input/output labels shown in the following table. Structured Text Input Output 1 to 24*1 (Including input/output labels) 1 to 24*1 (Including input/output labels) 0 to 253 (Including input/output labels) The input/output label is counted that each of input /output labels is one label. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE *1 : 5 Function block label SETTING LABELS Ladder Diagram SCREEN CONFIGURATION 4 Maximum number of input/output labels Programming language 3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS ■ 2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ● When label setting is changed after utilizing function blocks When the label setting of function block which is utilized to the ladder program is changed, compile the program or all programs. The change of input/output label is applied to the ladder program. Note that the change is not applied when the FB instance is not registered in the global label setting or local label setting. ● Class setting When an item other than the class, such as a label name or data type, is set in a blank column, "VAR" is automatically set for "Class". Change it if necessary. ● Characters that cannot be used for label names Any of the following label names causes an error at compilation. • A label name that includes a space. • A label name that begins with a numeral. • A label name which is same as the one used for devices. For characters that cannot be used for label names, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) ● Assigning devices automatically Devices are automatically assigned to labels when a program is compiled. The device assignment range can be changed on the Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting screen. (Section 5.8) The assigned devices can be checked with the cross reference function. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) OVERVIEW 1 5 - 11 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5.5 Common Operations for Setting Labels Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains the common operations for each label setting editor. 5.5.1 Classes A label class indicates the POU applicability and the usage of label. Selectable classes differ according to the type of label setting editor. The following table shows selectable classes for each label setting editor. : Applicable, ×: Not applicable Type of usable label setting editor Class Global label Local label Function block label VAR_GLOBAL A common label that can be used for programs and function blocks. × × VAR_GLOBAL_ CONSTANT A common label with a constant value that can be used for programs and function blocks. × × VAR A label that can be used for programs and function blocks. × VAR_CONSTANT A label with a constant value that can be used for programs and function blocks. × VAR_RETAIN*1 A latch-type label that is used within the range of declared program and function block. × VAR_INPUT A label that is used for an input of function block. Its value cannot be changed in a POU. × × VAR_OUTPUT A label that is used for an output of function block. × × VAR_IN_OUT A label that can be used for both input and output of function block with the same name. Its value can be changed in a POU. × × *1 : 5 - 12 Description Not supported by FXCPU. 5.5.1 Classes 5.5 Common Operations for Setting Labels Data types of label are described in the following table. For details such as value ranges of each data type, refer to the following manuals. MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual (Fundamentals) MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instruction) User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used. Note that data types differ according to the programming language (Ladder Diagram/Sequential Function Chart/Structured Text). The following table shows data types that can be used for each programming language. : Applicable, ×: Not applicable Programming language Data type 2 3 Structured Text Bit Word (signed) Double word (signed) Word (unsigned)/16-bit string × Double word (unsigned)/32-bit string × Single-precision real*1 Time × Timer *5 × Counter *5 × Retentive timer*4 *5 × Pointer *5 × PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS String*3 4 5 SETTING LABELS Double-precision real*2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Ladder Diagram/Sequential Function Chart For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only. Supported by Universal model QCPU/LCPU only. For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX3U and FX3UC only. For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only. For Ladder Diagram, these items cannot be used in an inline structured text program. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE *1 : *2 : *3 : *4 : *5 : OVERVIEW 1 Data types SCREEN CONFIGURATION 5.5.2 5.5.2 Data types 5 - 13 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5.5.3 Selecting data types Select a data type. A data type can be specified by directly entering the type in text or selecting it on the Data Type Selection screen. Screen display Click on the data type entry field on each label setting editor. Operating procedure 1. Select a type for "Type Class". Item 2. Description Simple Types Specify this to select a data type from basic types such as bit and word. Structured Data Types Specify this to select a data type from the defined structures. (Grayed out for structure settings) Function Blocks Specify this to select a data type from the defined function blocks. (Grayed out for structure settings) On the "Libraries" field, select the reference source such as the defined structure that is used as the data type. Item Description <ALL> Browse data types and structures/function blocks defined in the project, and all libraries. <Project> Browse data types and structures/function blocks defined in the project. (Not displayed when "Simple Types" is selected.) 3. On the "Data Type" field, select the data type, structure, or function block name. 4. Click the button when the setting is completed. The settings are displayed on the "Data Type" column on the label setting editor. 5 - 14 5.5.3 Selecting data types 5.5 Common Operations for Setting Labels ■ is in the selected status. 2 Setting arrays for data type Define the data type as an array. To define a data type as an array, set the items of "Array Element" on the Data Type Selection screen. SCREEN CONFIGURATION ● Method for displaying the Data Type Selection screen The Data Type Selection screen can be opened by any of the following operations when • Press the key. • Press the key. • Press the key. OVERVIEW 1 3 Operation 1. Click PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE on the data type entry field on each label setting editor. 2. Select "ARRAY" under "Array Element". 3. Enter the number of elements for "Element". 4. Set the data type of the array element in the 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS same manner as setting the normal data type. ● To change the offset To change the offset ([Array start value]..[Array end value]) to a value other than 0, edit the offset value by directly entering the array declaration in text on each label setting editor. SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 5.5.3 Selecting data types 5 - 15 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS ● To change the array to a two- or three-dimensional array Edit two- or three-dimensional array by directly entering the array declaration in text on each label setting editor. For details of array declarations, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual (Fundamentals) ● When a constant type is set for class For labels whose classes are set as VAR_CONSTANT or VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT, arrays cannot be set for the data type. If they are set, an error occurs at compilation. ● Offset values Minus values can be set for offset values. ● Using arrays in ladder programs The labels of two- or three-dimensional array and structure array cannot be used in ladder programs. ■ Setting data length of character string data type To change the data length of the character string data type, directly edit the data length on each label setting editor. The initial value of data length of the character string data type is set on the option setting. ● Changing data length on the label setting editor. Operation • Change the data length on the "Data Type" column on the label setting editor. Change these values directly. ● Changing initial value of data length Operation • Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Label Setting Editor" ⇒ "Default Length of String Date Type", and set the data length. 5 - 16 5.5.3 Selecting data types 5.5 Common Operations for Setting Labels 1 Label comments Label comments are not applied to device comments even when a program is compiled. 2 5.5.5 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Append a comment to a defined label. Label comments can be displayed on the ladder editor. Select [View] ⇒ [Comment] to display label comments. OVERVIEW 5.5.4 Editing rows Edit rows on the label setting editor. 3 Adding rows PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ■ Add a row on the label setting editor. ● New Declaration (Before) Insert a row above the selected row. 4 • Select [Edit] ⇒ [New Declaration (Before)] ( PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Operation ). 5 ● New Declaration (After) SETTING LABELS Insert a row below the selected row. Operation • Select [Edit] ⇒ [New Declaration (After)] ( ). 5.5.4 Label comments 5 - 17 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS • When "Automatic copy and increment when inserting a row" is selected Copy the class and label name, append a value after the label name, and add a row with the copied data below the specified row. If a value is already appended after the label name, the data is copied with an incremented value. When devices are set for global labels, the data is copied with an incremented device number. • When "Copy data type/comment items" is selected Copy the data type, comment, and remark, and add a row with the copied data below the specified row. 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE ● New Declaration (After) When using the New Declaration (After) function, the setting of added rows can be specified whether to leave cells blank or to enter label names or data types automatically. Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Label Setting Editor" ⇒ "Editor Setting". EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS ■ Deleting rows Delete a row on the label setting editor. Operation • Select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete Line] ( ). ■ Displaying all lines or first line of comments and remarks For the "Comment" and "Remark" columns, data can be entered in multiple lines. The 'all lines/first line display' function switches the display between all lines and only the first line by double-clicking "+" or "-". Only the first line is displayed. All lines are displayed. ■ Selecting all rows All rows can be selected by the following operation. Operation • Select [Edit] ⇒ [Select All]. 5 - 18 5.5.5 Editing rows 5.5 Common Operations for Setting Labels ■ 1 Sorting labels OVERVIEW Sort the labels in ascending/descending order by selecting a label item. Applicable to only local labels of program and global labels. Operation 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Sort] ⇒ [Class]/[Label Name]/[Data Type]/[Constant]/[Device]/[Comment]/ 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION [Remark]. The following confirmation message is displayed. button. Sort the selected item in ascending order. is displayed on the title name for ascending order. For descending order, select the same item again. descending order. 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 2. Click the PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 is displayed on the title name for SETTING LABELS 5 ● Sorting labels with label setting editor Labels can be also sorted by clicking a title name of label setting editor. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 ● Considerations for sorting labels The following are the considerations for sorting labels. • After sorting labels, the programs relating to the sorted labels are in the uncompiled status. • After sorting labels, [Edit] ⇒ [Undo]/[Redo] cannot be selected. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 5.5.5 Editing rows 5 - 19 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS ■ Displaying one last blank row only Display only one blank row under the label of last row on the label setting editor. Applicable to only local labels of program and global labels. Operation • Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Label Setting Editor", and select "Display last blank row". Only one blank row is displayed under the label of last row. ● Operation for editing rows When the cursor is on the last blank row on the label setting editor, [Edit] ⇒ [New Declaration (Before)]/[New Declaration (After)]/[Delete Line] cannot be selected. Select a row other than the last row for adding or deleting rows. ● Adding rows under the last row where a label is set When "Automatic copy and increment when inserting a row" is not set under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Label Setting Editor", executing the New Declaration (After) function on the last row where a label is set adds a row with class. "VAR_GLOBAL" for global label, "VAR" for local label is set. Change it if necessary. 5 - 20 5.5.5 Editing rows 5.5 Common Operations for Setting Labels 1 Deleting unused labels Extract unused labels from the set labels on the label setting editor, and delete them in batch. Unused labels are searched from the cross reference information. Target labels for this operation are local labels in programs of POU and global labels. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Operating procedure 1. OVERVIEW 5.5.6 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Unused label list]. The following message is displayed. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 2. Click the 4 button. 3. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Unused labels are extracted. The Unused label list screen is displayed. Select unused labels to be deleted under "Label name". Click the 5 button to cancel the selection of all unused labels. SETTING LABELS Click the button to select all unused labels. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 7 button. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Click the The following message is displayed. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 4. 5.5.6 Deleting unused labels 5 - 21 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5. Click the button. The selected unused labels are deleted. The program becomes uncompiled status after the unused labels are deleted, however, the operation to delete unused labels can be continued while the Unused label list screen is being displayed. ● Considerations when deleting unused labels The following are the considerations when deleting unused labels. • After unused labels are deleted, programs related to the deleted unused labels become uncompiled status. • The [Undo]/[Redo] operation under [Edit] cannot be selected after unused labels are deleted. • Labels in user libraries and functions/function blocks are not displayed on the Unused label list screen. • When "Create cross reference information after completion compile" is selected under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Compile" ⇒ "Basic Setting", the Unused label list screen cannot be displayed. 5 - 22 5.5.6 Deleting unused labels 5.6 Setting Structure Labels 1 Setting Structure Labels Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to set structure labels. OVERVIEW 5.6 2 Setting structures SCREEN CONFIGURATION 5.6.1 Set the elements of the structure on the Structure Setting screen. Screen display 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Select Project view ⇒ "POU" ⇒ "Structured Data Types" ⇒ "(structure)". PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Operating procedure Set the items on the screen. Maximum number of characters Description Enter a desired label name. 32 Data Type Set a data type from the Data Type Selection screen displayed by clicking . (Section 5.5.3) It can also be entered directly. 128 Constant Constant values are not displayed on the Structure Setting screen. 128 Comment*1, *2 Enter a comment. Comments can be displayed on the program editor by switching display/hide of comments. (Section 2.2.4) 1024 *1 : *2 : 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Label Name 5 SETTING LABELS Item A new line can be inserted in a cell by pressing the + keys. The compilation is not necessary after editing. ● Creating new structure data Create structure data using the Project view. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) ● When registering structure to the data type of system label Elements of the structure registered to the data type of system label cannot be edited. Elements of structure can be added and comments can be edited. However, when the edited information is applied to the system label data base, all references of the system labels which use the edited structure are deregistered. Register the canceled system labels again. 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS • SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 5.6.1 Setting structures 5 - 23 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5.6.2 Defining data type of label as structure To define the data type of label as a structure, set a structure in the data type entry field on each label setting editor. In addition to direct text entry, a structure can be selected on the Data Type Selection screen (Section 5.5.3). 5.6.3 Assigning devices to structure labels Devices of the structure global labels are set on the Structure Device Setting screen. If a structure is set for data type on the Global Label Setting screen, "Detail Setting" is displayed on the "Device" column. Click "Detail Setting" to display the Structure Device Setting screen. Screen display Click "Detail Setting" on the label setting editor. Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. Item Label Name 5 - 24 Description Display label names defined in the structure. Data Type Display data types set to label names. Device Set device names to be assigned. Automatic Filling Select this to set devices automatically to cells in which devices are not set with the same data type. Use Bit Designation Select this to enter device names automatically to bit devices using bit specification of word device. 5.6.2 Defining data type of label as structure 5.6 Setting Structure Labels The Automatic filling function can be used when setting series of devices for the data on the Structure Device Setting screen. When using the Automatic filling function, whether to use bit specification of word device can be selected. Operation 1. Click "Detail Setting" on the label setting editor. The Structure Device Setting screen is displayed. SCREEN CONFIGURATION Entering device names automatically 3 4 2. Enter the device name to the "Device" column. Series of devices are automatically set in the cells following the one entered, skipping the cells where devices are already set. ● When using bit specification Enter "D1" PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS ■ 2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ● Display on the Local Label Setting screen For the Structure Device Setting screen, the read-only screen is displayed. ● Setting devices of global labels Devices assigned to structure are not cleared even when elements of structure are changed on the Structure Setting screen. However, devices of member whose data type is changed or devices of member whose data type is changed to the one with different bit array are cleared. OVERVIEW 1 SETTING LABELS 5 Automatically set data 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● When not using bit specification Enter "D1" EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 Automatically set data SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 ● When not using bit specification When the bit specification is not used, clear "Use Bit Designation" on the Structure Device Setting screen. 5.6.3 Assigning devices to structure labels 5 - 25 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5.6.4 Assigning devices to structure array labels Set devices for structure array global labels on the Structure Device Setting screen. When VAR_GLOBAL is set for "Class" and the structure array is set for "Data Type" on the Global Label Setting screen, "Detail Setting" is displayed on the "Device" column. Click "Detail Setting" to display the Structure Device Setting screen. Screen display Click "Detail Setting" on the label setting editor. Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. Item Structure Array Display elements of the structure array in tree format. The device setting of the element selected from the tree is displayed on the right area of the screen. Label Name Display label names defined in the structure. Data Type Display data types set to label names. Device Set device names to be assigned. Device names can be entered for the start array element only. For the subsequent array elements, device names offset from the device number set for the start element are automatically set. Structure Array Offset Value 5 - 26 Description Word Device/Bit Device Specify the device offset value to be set in the array element. Use Bit Designation Select this to specify a bit device with bit-specified word device. 5.6.4 Assigning devices to structure array labels 5.6 Setting Structure Labels Entering device names automatically by setting offset values 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE On the Structure Device Setting screen, device numbers to be entered automatically can be set in fixed spacing for each array element of the structure array. Specify the difference in device numbers between the array elements as an offset value for the start device. Operation 1. Click "Detail Setting" on the label setting editor. The Structure Device Setting screen is displayed. 2. Set the device name for the start element data of the array. Devices are set to the data of the same data type on the editing screen and in the subsequent array elements. Offset value is not specified. <Array [0]> Enter "D1" 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS ■ 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION ● Display on the Local Label Setting screen For the Structure Device Setting screen, the read-only screen is displayed. ● Setting devices of global labels Devices assigned to structure are cleared when elements of structure are changed on the Structure Setting screen. However, devices of member whose data type is changed to the one with the same bit array are not cleared. ● Considerations when using system labels Structure array global labels on which "Structure Array Offset Value" is set cannot be registered as a system label. OVERVIEW 1 SETTING LABELS 5 <Array [1]> Devices starting from "D7" are assigned. 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 3. Set "Structure Array Offset Value". 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS By setting an offset value, devices to which the offset value is added are set to devices in the subsequent array elements. SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 5.6.4 Assigning devices to structure array labels 5 - 27 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Offset value is 10. <Array [0]> Enter "D1" <Array [1]> Devices starting from "D11" are assigned. ● Using bit specification Devices can be set by specifying a bit device of word device when entering devices automatically. Operation 1. Click "Detail Setting" on the label setting editor. The Structure Device Setting screen is displayed. 2. Set the device name to the start element word device data of the array. Devices are set for the same data type on the editing screen and in the subsequent array elements. 3. Select "Use Bit Designation". Bit-specified word devices are set to the bit devices. ● Data for which device name can be entered For structure arrays, a device name can be entered only for the start element of array. For the subsequent array elements, device names offset from the device number set for the start element are automatically set. ● Offset values • An expression such as '1\2' can be specified for an incremental value of device such as U0\G0. • When 0 is specified for the incremental value, the device number same as the data set to the start of devices is set to all data in the array. 5 - 28 5.6.4 Assigning devices to structure array labels 5.7 Checking Duplications of Devices Assigned to Global Labels Q CPU L CPU FX Checking duplications of device names ■ Operating procedure 1. Select [Tool] ⇒ [Check Device Duplication of Global Label]. Duplications of device names set on the device columns of the Global Label Setting screen are checked. The result is displayed on the Output window. 2. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION This section explains how to check duplications of devices assigned to global labels. The result of the duplication check is displayed on the Output window. 1 OVERVIEW Checking Duplications of Devices Assigned to Global Labels Double-click the result displayed on the Output window. 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS The corresponding error location in the program is displayed. The duplicated devices are displayed in red. For checking duplication results, refer to Section 10.4. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 5.7 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● Device names to be checked for duplications Character strings set on the device columns of the Global Label Setting screen are checked. All global label data in a project are the target. Note that, however, if the character strings set on the device columns are not supported by GX Works2, those devices are not checked. ● Corresponding error location of duplication check When the duplication of device names is found between global labels in single global label file, the device cell with lower row number is displayed. SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 5 - 29 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS 5.8 Setting Ranges for Devices Assigned Automatically Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to set the ranges for devices that are automatically assigned to local labels. The devices set as automatically assigned device are assigned to labels when a program is compiled. (Section 10.3) ■ QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU Screen display Select [Tool] ⇒ [Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting]. Latch selection field Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. Item Description Latch selection field Select latch (1) or latch (2). This item can be selected when the range of latch (1) or latch (2) is set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter. Device Display the devices to be assigned automatically. Digit Display whether the range of device assignment setting is in decimal or hexadecimal. Assignment Selection Assignment Range Start End Total Points Select the devices to be assigned automatically. Multiple devices can be set. Enter the range of device points to be assigned automatically. Display the total points of each device range for VAR and VAR_RETAIN. Display the device point range set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter. When the latch range is set, display the device point range with the latch range. PLC Parameter Device Setting Range 5 - 30 Example: When D: 0 to 12287, latch D: 5000 to 6000 are set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter, display range of D: 0 to 12287, range of latch D: 5000 to 6000. 5.8 Setting Ranges for Devices Assigned Automatically 1 FXCPU ■ OVERVIEW Screen display Select [Tool] ⇒ [Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting]. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Operating procedure Select the device type, and set the start and end addresses to be assigned automatically. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Considerations of automatically assigned devices 5 ● Considerations when changing automatically assigned devices All programs need to be compiled when the range of automatically assigned device is changed. Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the program change remain on the device-assigned labels. Perform the following operation as a precautionary measure. • For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including latches, clear all file registers, then switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN. • For FXCPU After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear the device memory of the programmable controller CPU with the PLC memory clear function, then switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN. (GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to Section 10.3.3. SETTING LABELS 5.8.1 4 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS • 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Assign devices to labels with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function when a program is compiled. For details, refer to Section 10.3. The assigned devices can be checked with the cross reference function. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) Devices within the range set on the Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting screen cannot be used in a program. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS ● Assigning devices with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function 5.8.1 Considerations of automatically assigned devices 5 - 31 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS ● Considerations when the multiple types of devices are assigned automatically (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) Refer to considerations of compilation. (Section 10.3.3) ● Device types and setting ranges The types of automatically assigned devices differ by the type of CPU. The setting ranges depend on the number of device points set in PLC parameter. For details of PLC parameter, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) ● Considerations when displaying the Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting screen When displaying the Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting screen, an error message may be displayed. In this case, terminate GX Works2, copy "vsflex8n.ocx" stored in the folder of GX Works2 installation destination to "C:\WINDOWS\system32" (for Windows XP), and restart GX Works2. ● Timers of Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting function for FXCPU (100ms, 10ms, retentive timer) When a program created with FXCPU is compiled, devices set to "100ms" under "Timers" are automatically assigned to the timer type labels. For assigning 10ms timer devices or retentive timer devices to the timer type labels, define the global label and specify the device number directly. Devices set to "10ms" and "Retentive" under "Timers" are used respectively in the following function blocks of FXCPU Structured project in Structured Text or Structured Ladder. • TIMER_10_FB_M : 10ms timer • TIMER_CONT_FB_M : Retentive timer 5 - 32 5.8.1 Considerations of automatically assigned devices 5.9 Writing/Reading Data to/from CSV Files 1 Writing/Reading Data to/from CSV Files Q CPU L CPU FX Writing label setting data ■ Write label setting data to CSV files. Operating procedure 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Write to CSV File] ( 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION This section explains how to write the label setting data to the CSV file and how to read the label setting data from the CSV file. OVERVIEW 5.9 3 ). PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE The following message is displayed. 2. Click the PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 button. The Write to CSV File screen is displayed. SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 7 button. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Enter the file name to be saved and click the The label setting data is saved in the save destination. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 3. 5 - 33 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS Reading label setting data ■ Read label setting data from CSV files. Operating procedure 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Read from CSV File] ( ). The Read from CSV File screen is displayed. 2. Select the file name to be read and click the The following message is displayed. 3. Click the button. The label setting data is read to the project. 5 - 34 button. 5.9 Writing/Reading Data to/from CSV Files ■ 1 CSV file format • Data of column which does not coincide in the title name of label setting editor cannot be read to the CSV file. • Columns order of the CSV file can be read even if it does not coincide in the columns order of label setting editor. <Label setting editor> Title name 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION • Data of column which coincides in the title name of label setting editor in the CSV file is read to label setting editor. OVERVIEW The title name of label setting editor links with the title name of the CSV file. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE <CSV file> Title name Restrictions 5 SETTING LABELS ● When multi-byte characters are used in the label name Do not use multi-byte characters for a label name when using a CSV file created in Japanese version of GX Works2 in other language version of GX Works2. When a CSV file which contains multi-byte characters is read in GX Works2 with the language version other than Japanese, the program cannot be compiled properly. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 5 - 35 GX Works2 5 SETTING LABELS MEMO 5 - 36 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 6 OVERVIEW 1 This chapter explains the functions of the ladder editor for editing ladder programs. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Creating Ladder Programs 6-2 6.2 Entering Instructions 6-6 6.3 Using Function Blocks 6 - 22 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 6.4 Using Inline Structured Text 6 - 23 5 6.5 Moving Cursor to Start of Ladder Block 6 - 29 6.6 Drawing Lines 6 - 30 6.7 Deleting Contacts, Coils, and Application Instructions 6 - 34 6.8 Deleting Lines 6 - 37 6.9 Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns 6 - 41 6.10 Batch Inserting and Deleting NOP Instructions 6 - 46 6.11 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Ladder Programs 6 - 48 6.12 Canceling Previous Operation 6 - 60 6.13 Restoring Ladder Programs to the Status of After Conversion 6 - 61 6.14 Considerations for Editing Ladder Programs 6 - 62 6.15 Changing T/C Setting Values 6 - 69 8 6.16 Writing/Reading List Format Programs 6 - 71 6.17 Setting Program Linkage Order (FXCPU) 6 - 75 SETTING LABELS 6.1 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 4 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 SEARCH AND REPLACE 7 6-1 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.1 Creating Ladder Programs Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to create ladder programs and related functions. 6.1.1 Switching between overwrite mode and insert mode Switch between 'Overwrite mode' and 'Insert mode'. Select the appropriate mode to create programs. The operation procedures in this chapter are explained under the 'Overwrite mode' as the basic setting. Operating procedure • Press the key. The mode switches alternately between 'Overwrite' and 'Insert' each time the key is pressed. The color of the cursor on the editing screen changes according to the active mode. ● In the 'Overwrite mode', contacts, coils, or application instructions newly input at the cursor position overwrite the existing ones. Example: Changing X20 to a horizontal line in the 'Overwrite mode'. Cursor position 6-2 6.1.1 Switching between overwrite mode and insert mode 6.1 Creating Ladder Programs ● In the 'Insert mode', contacts, coils, or application instructions newly input at the cursor position are inserted in front of the cursor. 1 OVERVIEW Example: Inserting X15 in front of X20 in the 'Insert mode'. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Cursor position 6.1.2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Switching between write mode and read mode Switch between write mode and read mode or monitor (write mode) and monitor mode. Switch the mode to avoid editing programs directly. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 ● Write mode/monitor (write mode) Select when editing ladder programs. 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● Read mode/monitor mode Select when operating other than editing ladder programs. Enter a device directly on the program editor to display the Find screen, and search for a device. The color of the cursor turns to dark blue as shown below in the read mode/monitor mode. "Read only" is displayed on the screen title. SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.1.2 Switching between write mode and read mode 6-3 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Switching between read mode and write mode ■ Switch between 'read mode' and 'write mode' on the active program editor. Operating procedure • Select [Edit] ⇒ [Ladder Edit Mode] ⇒ [Read Mode] ( )/[Write Mode] ( ). The mode is switched between 'Read mode' and 'Write mode'. Switching between monitor mode and monitor (write mode) ■ Switch between 'monitor mode' and 'monitor (write mode)' on the active program editor during monitoring. For details of monitoring, refer to Chapter 12. Operating procedure 1. Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Monitor Mode] ( )/[Monitor (Write Mode)] ( ). When switched to 'monitor (write mode)', the message shown below is displayed. Clear the check boxes if the function displayed on a message is not executed when switching the mode. 2. Click the button. The mode is switched between 'Monitor mode' and 'Monitor (write mode)'. 6-4 6.1.2 Switching between write mode and read mode 6.1 Creating Ladder Programs SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ● Switching between write mode and read mode or monitor (write mode) and monitor mode When "Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor, Monitor (Write))" is cleared under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram", the program can be edited directly with the same operation as that in the 'write mode' for ladder program editing and the 'monitor (write mode)' for monitoring. ● Considerations of 'read mode'/'monitor mode The programs cannot be edited directly in the 'read mode'/'monitor mode'. However, executing the following operation may change the programs. • When the source FB name is changed or the FB is deleted • When input/output labels of the source FB are changed and compiled • When the devices or labels are replaced with the replacement function by specifying the whole project • When TC setting change is executed Use the security function to prevent editing the programs. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) ● Displaying in 'read mode'/'monitor mode' When the master control instructions are used in the ladder program, the nesting numbers are displayed as shown below. For details of nesting number of master control, refer to Section 2.2.1. OVERVIEW 1 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 ● Assigning shortcut keys When "Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor, Monitor (Write))" is selected under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram", the functions assigned to the shortcut keys are changed as shown below table. If the shortcut keys are assigned to other functions, the settings shown in the table are given priority, and the assigned shortcut keys are ignored. Use the key customize function to set/change the shortcut keys. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) Selected - Write mode + - Read mode Start Monitoring Monitor mode + Start Watching Monitor (write mode) 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Cleared 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE ● Monitor (write mode) for FXCPU 'Monitor (write mode)' is not supported by FXCPU in the following conditions. • When using FX0, FX0S, or FX1 • When using SFC programs • When the simulation function is being performed The "Verify PLC and editing target program of GX Works2" function is not supported when the mode is changed to 'monitor (Write mode)' in a project with labels. Verify the program with the Verify with PLC function before changing the mode to 'monitor (write mode)'. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Shortcut key 5 SETTING LABELS A nesting number is displayed. 6.1.2 Switching between write mode and read mode 6-5 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.2 Entering Instructions This section explains how to enter instructions using menus. For other entering methods, refer to the Points of each section. 6.2.1 Entering contacts, coils, and application instructions Q CPU L CPU Enter contacts, coils, and application instructions. Contacts, coils, and application instructions are entered by using the Enter Symbol screen. Item Open contact branch + Closed contact Closed contact branch + Coil Application instruction Rising pulse*1 + pulse*1 + Rising pulse branch*1 + Falling pulse branch*1 + Rising pulse close*2 ++ Falling pulse close*2 ++ Rising pulse close branch*2 ++ Falling pulse close branch*2 ++ Operation result rising pulse*3 + Operation result falling pulse*3 ++ Invert operation *1 : *2 : *3 : 6-6 Shortcut key Open contact Falling Element Toolbar results*1 ++ Not supported by FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, and FX2C Supported by Universal model QCPU/LCPU only. Not supported by FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, and FX2NC. 6.2.1 Entering contacts, coils, and application instructions FX 6.2 Entering Instructions 1 Operating procedure Move the cursor to the position where an element is entered. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Ladder Symbol] ⇒ [(element)]. OVERVIEW 1. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 The Enter Symbol screen is displayed. Consecutive element entry button Instruction device entry field 3 The following table shows the display contents of the screen. Name Description Element selection field Instruction device entry field Consecutive entry ON, Consecutive entry OFF Allow device comment entry after element by changing the setting to consecutive entry status. (Section 6.2.4) Consecutive entry ON, Consecutive entry OFF Allow changing the setting of elements. Clicking the button displays the list of elements. Enter an instruction and/or a device. 3. Enter an instruction and/or a device. 4. Click the 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Consecutive device comment entry button Allow consecutive entry of elements by changing the setting to consecutive entry status. 5 SETTING LABELS Consecutive element entry button PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Element selection field Consecutive device comment entry button button. The entered element is displayed on the editing screen. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS ● Displaying the Enter Symbol screen The Enter Symbol screen can be displayed by pressing the key. SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.2.1 Entering contacts, coils, and application instructions 6-7 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ■ Simple editing of devices/labels when entering elements Edit a device/label on the Enter Symbol screen. ● Open the Enter Symbol screen while the device/label is selected. Operation • Press the + + keys. ● Move the selection of the device/label. Operation • Press the + / keys. d+¡ ● Increment/decrement the device/label. Operation • Press the + / keys. d+ ● Increment and decrement • When incrementing a label that does not have a number, 0 is suffixed to it. • For a device in hexadecimal format, it is incremented/decremented in the hexadecimal format. For X or Y device of FXCPU, it is incremented/decremented in the octal format. 6-8 6.2.1 Entering contacts, coils, and application instructions 6.2 Entering Instructions When the label that is entered on the Enter Symbol screen is not defined, it can be registered to the label setting editor following the element entry. For registering a new label following the element entry, "Open Undefined Label Registration dialog at ladder entry" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram" needs to be selected. 1. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Operating procedure OVERVIEW 1 Registering undefined labels during program creation ■ Enter the undefined label on the Enter Symbol screen. 3 Click the button. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 2. The Undefined Label Registration screen is displayed. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Set the items on the screen. Label Setting Information 4. Select a label setting editor name to be registered from the list displayed by clicking . Class Select a label class from the list displayed by clicking Data Type Set the data type on the Data Type Selection screen by clicking (Section 5.5.3) Direct data entry is also possible. Constant Display the constant value of the selected data type. When "VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT" is selected for "Class" and simple type is selected for "Data Type", the constant value can be set. Comment*1 Enter label comments. Switch display/hide label comments to display the label comments on the program editor. (Section 2.2.4) . . 7 8 A new line can be inserted in a cell by pressing the + keys. Click the button. The undefined label is registered to the label setting editor. 6.2.1 Entering contacts, coils, and application instructions EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Display the label name entered on the Ladder Symbol screen. Label Name *1 : 6 Description EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Item SEARCH AND REPLACE 3. SETTING LABELS 5 6-9 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ■ Displaying instructions/labels and instruction tooltip When entering on the Enter Symbol screen, the instructions/labels and instruction tooltip are displayed. ● Instructions/labels When one or more characters are entered on the Enter Symbol screen, instructions/labels whose first characters match are displayed. The instruction/label can be entered by selecting with the up/down key. Details of instruction/label can be checked on the tooltip. ● Displaying instructions/labels If the entry field is blank, an instruction/label can be selected by pressing the + keys. ● Displaying/hiding instructions/labels Instructions/labels can be displayed/hidden by selecting "Display available instructions in entering instruction"/"Display available labels in entering instruction" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder/SFC" ⇒ "Enter ladder" ⇒ "Display setting". ● Instruction tooltip When the instruction is entered, the argument that is used for that instruction is displayed on the tooltip. The next instruction option is displayed by clicking the tooltip or by pressing the + + + keys. Click ● Displaying/hiding instruction tooltips Instruction tooltips can be displayed/hidden by selecting "Display available instruction tool hints in entering instruction" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder/SFC" ⇒ "Enter ladder" ⇒ "Display setting". 6 - 10 6.2.1 Entering contacts, coils, and application instructions 6.2 Entering Instructions • A maximum number of rows that can be processed in a single ladder conversion operation is 48. Perform ladder conversion appropriately during editing so that the number of rows that has not been converted does not exceed over 48. ● Scrolling on the ladder editor When ladder programs that have not been converted exist, the scroll on the ladder editor cannot be performed. Convert the programs, and then scroll with no unconverted ladder programs exist. ● Wrapping a line The maximum number of contacts that can be created in a single rung is "Display Connection of Ladder Diagram" + 1 coil. Set "Display Connection of Ladder Diagram" by selecting [Ladder Diagram] under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ [Program Editor] ⇒ [Ladder] ⇒ [Ladder Diagram]. (Section 2.2.7) When the maximum number of contacts is exceeded, the wrapping source symbol ( ) and the wrapping destination symbol ( ) are automatically created and the line is wrapped. The same numbers (serial numbers) are assigned to the wrapping source symbol ( ) and the wrapping destination symbol ( ) that are created in pairs. Wrapping source symbol (->) 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION • A maximum number of rows that can be used for a single ladder block is 24. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ● Entering contacts and coils Elements can also be entered by entering only devices/labels at the specified position. They are entered as coils when they are connected to the right power rail, or output devices (Y, DY) are entered. For other circumstances, they are entered as contacts. ● Allowable number of rows for creating ladder programs OVERVIEW 1 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 5 SETTING LABELS Wrapping destination symbol (>-) Ctrl + ● Displaying the Instruction Help screen at the occurrence of element entry error The Instruction Help screen can be displayed automatically by the following setting. (Section 6.2.2) Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram", and select "Display Instruction Help at symbol error occurrence". 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● Changing the cursor position on the editing screen while the Enter Symbol screen is displayed Use the + keys to change the cursor position on the editing screen. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.2.1 Entering contacts, coils, and application instructions 6 - 11 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.2.2 Instruction help Q CPU L CPU FX The following explains the help function that supports entering elements. The help function can be used on the ladder editor only. Operating procedure 1. Click the button on the Enter Symbol screen. The <<Instruction Selection>> tab on the Instruction Help screen is displayed. 2. Select the instruction type from "Type List". The instructions of the selected type are displayed on "Instruction List". (For details of the <<Find Instruction>> tab, refer to Point.) 3. Select an instruction from "Instruction List". The information of the selected instruction is displayed on the instruction detail field. 4. Click the button. The Detail Instruction Help screen is displayed. 5. Set the items on the screen. Item 6. Description Pulse Form Select this item to convert the instruction into pulse. Input Device Enter devices. Indication of the symbols: " * " : Applicable " - " : Not applicable Click the button on the Detail Instruction Help screen. The instruction is entered at the cursor position. 6 - 12 6.2.2 Instruction help Instruction detail 6.2 Entering Instructions Search method can be switched by clicking the or button. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION ● Instruction help function The Instruction help function has the <<Instruction Selection>> and <<Find Instruction>> tabs. The <<Instruction Selection>> tab is displayed when no instruction is entered in the device instruction entry field of the Enter Symbol screen, and the <<Find Instruction>> tab is displayed when an instruction is entered in the instruction device entry field. ● Instruction retrieval function If the instruction is entered incompletely or the entered instruction is not supported, the <<Find Instruction>> tab is displayed on the Instruction Help screen when "Display Instruction Help at symbol error occurrence" is selected in the option setting. If the starting characters of the instructions match with the entered characters, the corresponding instructions are displayed. OVERVIEW 1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 button on the Detail Instruction Help screen. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Details of the instruction can be displayed by clicking the ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) 5 SETTING LABELS ● Checking instructions The specified instruction can be checked on the Instruction Help screen displayed by right-clicking and selecting [Open Instruction Help] from the shortcut menu. ● Details of instruction PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 6.2.2 Instruction help 6 - 13 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.2.3 Selecting the duplicated coil check function Q CPU L CPU FX Check duplicated coils in the same program when entering a coil to a converted ladder program. The duplicated-coil check function can be set by setting the option. Screen display Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder/SFC" ⇒ "Enter ladder". Operating procedure • Select "Check duplicated coil". When a coil is entered, duplicated coils are checked. : Available ×: Not available -: Not supported Instruction Device QCPU (Q mode)/ LCPU FXCPU 6 - 14 DELTA EGP EGF FF MC OUT SET SFT PLS PLF Y, M, L, B, F, SM, SB × × D, SD, W, SW, R, ZR × × DY × T, C × × × × × × × × V × × × × × × × × BL × × × × × × × × Y, M - - - - S - - - × - × × T, C - - - × × - × × 6.2.3 Selecting the duplicated coil check function 6.2 Entering Instructions Q CPU L CPU FX Enter a device comment following the entry of a contact, coil, or application instruction. 2 Screen display SCREEN CONFIGURATION Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder/SFC" ⇒ "Enter ladder". 3 Operating procedure • OVERVIEW 1 Entering device comments Select "Enter label comment and device comment". The Input Device Comment screen is displayed by clicking the contact, coil, or application instruction. button after entering a PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 6.2.4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 5 SETTING LABELS For the method for entering device comments, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) ● Entering device comments 6 on the Enter Symbol screen. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS A device comment can be entered following the element entry by clicking (Section 6.2.1) EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.2.4 Entering device comments 6 - 15 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.2.5 Entering pointer numbers and interrupt pointer numbers Q CPU L CPU FX Enter a pointer number or an interrupt pointer number. Pointer numbers or interrupt pointer numbers are entered by using the Enter Symbol screen. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where a pointer number or an interrupt pointer number is entered. Enter a pointer number or an interrupt pointer number at the position where a step number is displayed. 2. Press the key. The Enter Symbol screen is displayed. 3. Enter a pointer number or an interrupt pointer number. 4. Click the button. The entered pointer number or interrupt pointer number is displayed on the editing screen. 6 - 16 6.2.5 Entering pointer numbers and interrupt pointer numbers 6.2 Entering Instructions Opening local label setting screen for program being edited Q CPU L CPU FX Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being edited. 2 Operating procedure • 1 OVERVIEW 6.2.6 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Select [View] ⇒ [Open Other Window] ⇒ [Open Label Setting]. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Creating wrapping lines Q CPU L CPU FX Wrapping symbols are automatically created if wrapping of a line is required when creating a ladder block. They can also be entered manually. Operating procedure Move the cursor to the position where a wrapping source symbol ( ) is entered. ), move the cursor to the second or subsequent 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS When entering a wrapping source symbol ( columns. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 1. 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.2.7 SETTING LABELS 5 6.2.6 Opening local label setting screen for program being edited 6 - 17 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Ladder Symbol] ⇒ [Horizontal Line] ( ). The Enter HLine screen is displayed. 3. Enter 'K (+ desired number)'. 4. Click the button. The wrapping source symbol ( ) is entered and the line is wrapped. Wrapping source symbol (->) 5. Move the cursor to the position where a wrapping destination symbol ( ) is entered. When entering a wrapping destination symbol ( 6. ), move the cursor to the first column. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Ladder Symbol] ⇒ [Horizontal Line] ( ). The Enter HLine screen is displayed. 7. Enter 'K (+ number input in step 3)'. A wrapping source symbol ( ) and a wrapping destination symbol ( ) are used in pairs for wrapping symbols. Enter the same number for the paired wrapping symbols. 6 - 18 6.2.7 Creating wrapping lines 6.2 Entering Instructions 8. Click the 1 button. OVERVIEW The wrapping destination symbol ( ) is entered. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 Wrapping destination symbol (>-) 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ● Changing the number of contacts displayed on a ladder program The number of contacts (9, 11, 13, 17, or 21) displayed on a single rung can be changed. (Section 2.2.7) ● A situation when wrapping symbols are deleted When a ladder program is converted, instructions are shifted forward. As the result, the unnecessary wrapping symbols are deleted. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Convert SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.2.7 Creating wrapping lines 6 - 19 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.2.8 Displaying/editing ladder blocks in list format Q CPU L CPU FX Display/edit ladder programs in the list format. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the ladder block to be displayed in the list format. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Easy Edit] ⇒ [Edit List for Ladder Block]. The Edit List of Ladder Block screen is displayed. 3. Move the cursor to the row to be edited in the list format, and press the key. The Enter List screen is displayed. 4. Enter an instruction and click the button. The instruction is applied to the data on the Edit List of Ladder Block screen. 6 - 20 6.2.8 Displaying/editing ladder blocks in list format 6.2 Entering Instructions 5. Click the 1 button. OVERVIEW The edited content is applied to the ladder block. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 Screen button ● Number of characters that can be entered The following table shows the number of characters that can be entered when editing a program in the list format. Number of characters Global label Local label Structure member label 32 characters FB input/output label 16 characters Defined FB name 32 characters Statement 64 characters Note 32 characters 5 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Item 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS ● Considerations when editing programs in list format The following are the considerations when editing programs in the list format. • A maximum number of rows that can be used per ladder block is 24 in the ladder program. When the number of rows of ladder block exceeds 24 as the result of editing in the list format, the ladder block is displayed in yellow. • If an unconverted ladder block exists in a ladder program, the program cannot be edited even when the selected ladder block has been converted. • END instructions cannot be edited. • Ladder blocks that contain function blocks can be displayed in the list format, but cannot be edited. • Device comments and line statements displayed on a tree view of the Navigation window are not displayed on the Edit List of Ladder Block screen. • The width of column on the Edit List of Ladder Block screen cannot be changed. SETTING LABELS Displays the Instruction Help screen. (Section 6.2.2) PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 ● EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.2.8 Displaying/editing ladder blocks in list format 6 - 21 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.3 Using Function Blocks Q CPU L CPU This section explains how to utilize function blocks as components in sequence programs. To use function blocks, select "Use Label" when creating a new project. For details of method for using function blocks, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block) 6 - 22 FX 6.4 Using Inline Structured Text 1 Using Inline Structured Text Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains the Inline structured text function. OVERVIEW 6.4 Feature of Inline structured text Inline structured text is a function to edit/monitor a program by creating an inline structured text box that displays an ST program, at the coil instruction area on the ladder editor of the project with labels. With this function, a numeric value operation or a character string process can be easily created in the ladder program. Select "Enable calling function block and using inline ST" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Compile" ⇒ "Basic Setting" to use the Inline structured text function. For considerations for using the Inline structured text function, refer to Section 6.4.5. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 6.4.1 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS < Using ladder program > SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS < Using Inline structured text > 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Inline structured text box (STB) 6.4.1 Feature of Inline structured text 6 - 23 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.4.2 Inserting inline structured text box Insert an inline structured text box on the ladder editor. Operating procedure • Select [Edit] ⇒ [Inline Structured Text] ⇒ [Insert Inline Structured Text Box] ( An inline structured text box is inserted. ● Inserting an inline structured text box An inline structured text box can be also inserted by entering "STB" on the Enter Symbol screen. • An inline structured text box can be also inserted by pressing the + keys. • A maximum number of inline structured text boxes that can be inserted is 100 per program, and 400 per project. 6 - 24 6.4.2 Inserting inline structured text box ). 6.4 Using Inline Structured Text 6.4.3 1 Editing inline structured text program OVERVIEW Edit an inline structured text program. Operating procedure 1. 2 Double-click the inline structured text box, or press the key. SCREEN CONFIGURATION The inline structured text box becomes editing status. Edit the inline structured text program. The editing method of the inline structured text program is the same as that of Structured Text. For editing programs in Structured Text, refer to the following manuals. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual (Fundamentals) Click the area other than the inline structured text box, or press the key. 5 SETTING LABELS The editing of the inline structured text program ends. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 3. 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 2. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 6.4.3 Editing inline structured text program 6 - 25 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● Editing inline structured text programs The editing status can be switched by pressing the key. ● Displaying instructions/labels in inline structured text When displaying instructions/labels in the inline structured text, the following options must be set. Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "ST" ⇒ "Instruction/label name prediction". For details of displaying instructions/labels, refer to Section 6.2.1. ● Displaying inline structured text program in a list format The compiled inline structured text program can be displayed in a list format. Select an inline structured text box to be displayed, and select [View] ⇒ [Display Compile Result]. The compilation result is not displayed when the compilation target is an assignment command in which the source data and the target data are the same. Example in Structured Text: M0 :=M0; 6 - 26 6.4.3 Editing inline structured text program 6.4 Using Inline Structured Text 6.4.4 1 Deleting inline structured text box OVERVIEW Delete an inline structured text box. Operating procedure 2 Select an inline structured text box to be deleted. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 1. 2. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete], or press the key. One ladder block containing the inline structured text box is deleted. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 SETTING LABELS 5 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● Range selection when deleting an inline structured text box When deleting a ladder block containing a inline structured text box, include the left side of the left power rail. If this area is not selected, a ladder block cannot be deleted. 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Can be deleted. SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 Cannot be deleted. 6.4.4 Deleting inline structured text box 6 - 27 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.4.5 Considerations for using Inline structured text function The following explains the considerations for using the Inline structured text function. 1) Considerations for creating ladder programs • One inline structured text box can be created for one ladder block. • An FB and an inline structured text box cannot be used both in a ladder block. • When the creation of an inline structured text box is attempted at the contact instruction area, an inline structured text box is created at the coil instruction area. • A ladder program cannot be edited if the ladder block including an unconverted inline structured text program exists on the ladder editor. Edit a program after converting it. • Function blocks using inline structured text programs cannot be used in programs other than Ladder Diagram. 2) Considerations for editing in inline structured text box • A maximum number of characters that can be entered is 2048. However, two characters are used as the line feed. • 23 local labels can be used in an inline structured text box. (Except for constants) • The following data type labels cannot be used. • Counter • Timer • Retentive timer • Pointer • Structure • Array • Function block • By setting the option, lower-case device names can be used as labels only for device names which are out of the range set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameters. • Instructions cannot be entered using the Function Block Selection window. • The editing status cannot be recovered to the previous status by the operation such as selecting [Edit] ⇒ [Undo]. • Word device indirect specification (@D0) cannot be executed. 3) Copying inline structured text box When copying an inline structured text box, select a ladder block including the left side of the left power rail. Contacts of a ladder block containing an inline structured text box only or an inline structured text box only, cannot be copied. A ladder block containing an unconverted inline structured text box also cannot be copied. Copy a ladder block after converting the program. (Chapter 10) 4) Re-pasting after deleting inline structured text box*1 When compiling with re-pasting the data which existed in the deleted inline structured text box, the compile result will not be the same program as before deleting the inline structured text box. The devices to be assigned automatically are changed when a program is compiled. Therefore, verifying the re-pasted project may cause the verification inconsistency. *1 : 6 - 28 Re-paste is to create or paste the same data as deleted inline structured text box. 6.4.5 Considerations for using Inline structured text function 6.5 Moving Cursor to Start of Ladder Block 1 Moving Cursor to Start of Ladder Block Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to move the cursor from the current position to the start of the next/ previous ladder block. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Operating procedure • OVERVIEW 6.5 Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Jump to Next Ladder Block Start]/[Jump to Previous Ladder Block Start]. The cursor moves to the start of the ladder block. 3 Example: When jumping to the start of the next ladder block PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE The cursor moves to the start of the next ladder block. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 5 SETTING LABELS ● Moving the cursor The cursor can be also moved to the start of the next/previous ladder block by pressing the + + / keys. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6 - 29 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.6 Drawing Lines Q CPU L CPU This section explains how to draw lines. Item Toolbar Shortcut key Edit Line Vertical Line + +/ Horizontal Line +/ Enter horizontal line consecutively 6.6.1 - ++/ Drawing lines Draw vertical and horizontal lines consecutively. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where a vertical line is drawn. A line is drawn taking the left edge of the cursor as a base point. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Edit Line] ( ). 3. Drag the cursor to the line drawing direction. Drag 4. The line is drawn upon completion of dragging. 5. To end the line drawing function, select [Edit] ⇒ [Edit Line] ( ) again. The edit line mode is disabled. 6 - 30 6.6.1 Drawing lines FX 6.6 Drawing Lines 1 Entering vertical or horizontal lines Enter a vertical or horizontal line. Operating procedure 1. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Entering vertical or horizontal lines by specifying the number of rows or columns ■ OVERVIEW 6.6.2 Move the cursor to the position where a vertical or horizontal line is entered. A vertical line is entered taking the left edge of the cursor as a base point. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Ladder Symbol] ⇒ [Vertical Line] ( ). The Enter VLine screen is displayed. To enter a horizontal line, select [Edit] ⇒ [Ladder Symbol] ⇒ [Horizontal Line] ( ). The maximum number of horizontal lines from the cursor position is displayed on the title of the Enter HLine screen. Consecutive entry button Number of rows or columns Consecutive entry button Number of rows or columns 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 2. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Set the items on the screen. Consecutive entry ON, Consecutive entry OFF Number of rows or columns Enter the number of rows or columns to be entered. The applicable number of rows or columns to enter lines toward the down or right direction is displayed when the screen is opened. Change the value as required. For entering horizontal line, enter minus value to insert horizontal lines toward left direction. Stop at the connection point Select this to stop data entry on a connecting point when the connecting points such as instructions and vertical lines exist while entering the horizontal lines for the columns entered to "Number of rows or columns". Set when entering the horizontal lines. This item links with "Stop at the connection points (Instruction/Vertical Line) when enter or delete horizontal line" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram". EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Consecutive entry button 6 Description Allow consecutive entry of vertical or horizontal lines by changing the status. 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Name 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 3. SETTING LABELS 5 6.6.2 Entering vertical or horizontal lines 6 - 31 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 4. Click the button. The entered vertical line or horizontal line is displayed on the editing screen. Entering vertical or horizontal lines with shortcut key ■ Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where a vertical or horizontal line is entered. A vertical line is entered taking the left edge of the cursor as a base point. 2. Press the + /// keys. A vertical or horizontal line is entered. However, the position where a vertical or horizontal line is already inserted is deleted. The following is an example when the + keys are pressed three times. 6 - 32 6.6.2 Entering vertical or horizontal lines 6.6 Drawing Lines ● Entering horizontal lines consecutively Use the + + / keys to enter the horizontal lines from the cursor position to the next contact/coil/line connection point consecutively . The position where a horizontal line is already inserted is deleted. + Shift 4 + PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Ctrl 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE + Ctrl 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION ● Initial values of 'number of rows or columns' The initial value of the Enter HLine screen can be set to 1 with option settings. Select "Set initial value to '1' for Enter HLine/Delete HLine dialog" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram". ● Changing the cursor position on the editing screen while the Enter VLine screen or Enter HLine screen is displayed Use the + keys to change the cursor position on the editing screen. OVERVIEW 1 SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.6.2 Entering vertical or horizontal lines 6 - 33 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.7 Deleting Contacts, Coils, and Application Instructions Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to delete contacts, coils, and application instructions. 6.7.1 Deleting contacts, coils, and application instructions in unit of instruction Delete a contact, coil or application instruction in unit of instruction. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where the instruction is deleted. 2. Press the key. The instruction is deleted. ● Deletion in the 'Insert mode' If the instruction is deleted in the 'Insert mode', the instructions that follow the deleted instruction are shifted forward. With wrapping lines, the instructions are shifted when the ladder program is converted. 6 - 34 6.7.1 Deleting contacts, coils, and application instructions in unit of instruction 6.7 Deleting Contacts, Coils, and Application Instructions 1 Deleting contacts, coils, and application instructions by setting a range OVERVIEW 6.7.2 Delete contacts, coils, and/or application instructions by setting a range. Operating procedure Set the range by dragging the cursor from the start position of deletion. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 1. 2 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Drag PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 2. SETTING LABELS 5 Press the key. The elements in the set range are deleted. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 ● The range can be set by pressing the + keys. Shift SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 + 6.7.2 Deleting contacts, coils, and application instructions by setting a range 6 - 35 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.7.3 Deleting a ladder block Delete one ladder block at a time. Operating procedure 1. Place the cursor at the start position of deletion and drag it up or down to set the range. Specify the range of a ladder block at the position where step numbers are displayed. Drag 2. Press the key. The ladder block is deleted. 6 - 36 6.7.3 Deleting a ladder block 6.8 Deleting Lines 1 Deleting Lines Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to delete lines. Delete Vertical Line + + / Delete Horizontal Line + + / Delete horizontal line consecutively 6.8.1 2 Shortcut key + SCREEN CONFIGURATION Toolbar + + / - 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Item Delete Line Deleting lines Delete vertical and horizontal lines consecutively. 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Operating procedure 1. OVERVIEW 6.8 Move the cursor to the position where the lines are deleted. The vertical line is deleted taking the left edge of the cursor as a base point. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete Line] ( ). 3. Drag the cursor to the line deletion direction. 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 2. SETTING LABELS 5 The selected lines are displayed in yellow. 7 4. The lines are deleted upon completion of dragging. 5. To end the Delete Line function, select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete Line] ( ) again. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Drag 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE The line deletion mode is disabled. 6.8.1 Deleting lines 6 - 37 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.8.2 Deleting vertical or horizontal lines Delete a vertical or horizontal line. Deleting vertical/horizontal lines by specifying the number of rows or columns ■ Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the start of the vertical or horizontal line to be deleted. The vertical line is deleted taking the left edge of the cursor as a base point. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Ladder Symbol] ⇒ [Delete Vertical Line] ( ). The Delete VLine screen is displayed. To enter a horizontal line, select [Edit] ⇒ [Ladder Symbol] ⇒ [Delete Horizontal Line] ( Consecutive entry button 3. Deletion number of rows or columns Deletion number of rows or columns Set the items on the screen. Name Consecutive entry button 6 - 38 Consecutive entry button ). Description Allow consecutive deletion of vertical lines by changing the status. Consecutive entry ON, Consecutive entry OFF Deletion number of rows or columns Enter the number of rows or columns to be deleted. The applicable number of rows or columns to delete lines toward the down or right direction is displayed when the screen is opened. Change the value as required. Stop at the connection point Select this to stop deletion on a connecting point when the connecting points such as instructions and vertical lines exist while deleting the horizontal lines for the columns entered to "Deletion number of rows or columns". Set when deleting the horizontal lines. This item links with "Stop at the connection points (Instruction/Vertical Line) when enter or delete horizontal line" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram". 6.8.2 Deleting vertical or horizontal lines 6.8 Deleting Lines 4. Click the 1 button. OVERVIEW Vertical or horizontal lines are deleted. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 4 + PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Ctrl 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ● Initial values of 'deletion number of rows or columns' The initial value of the Delete HLine screen can be set to 1 with option settings. Select "Set initial value to '1' for Enter HLine/Delete HLine dialog" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Ladder Diagram". ● Changing the cursor position on the editing screen while the Delete VLine screen or Delete HLine screen is displayed. Use the + keys to change the cursor position on the editing screen. 5 SETTING LABELS Deleting vertical or horizontal lines with shortcut key ■ Operating procedure Move the cursor to the start of the vertical or horizontal line to be deleted. The vertical line is deleted taking the left edge of the cursor as a base point. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 1. 6.8.2 Deleting vertical or horizontal lines 6 - 39 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 2. Press the + /// keys. Vertical or horizontal lines are deleted. However, a vertical or horizontal line is inserted to the position where a vertical or horizontal line is not inserted. The following is an example when the + keys are pressed twice. 6 - 40 6.8.2 Deleting vertical or horizontal lines 6.9 Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns 1 Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to insert and delete rows and columns. Delete Row + Insert Column + Delete Column + 3 Inserting rows PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 6.9.1 2 Shortcut key + SCREEN CONFIGURATION Item Insert Row Insert rows. Operating procedure 4 Move the cursor to the position where a row is inserted. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 1. OVERVIEW 6.9 To insert multiple rows, drag the cursor and set the range corresponding to the number of rows to be inserted. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS The rows in the set range are inserted. To insert a single row, it is not necessary to set the range. In the screen image below, the range for inserting three rows is set. 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 Drag 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 2. SETTING LABELS 5 6.9.1 Inserting rows 6 - 41 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 3. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Insert Row]. A space is inserted above the cursor position. The screen image below shows insertion of a space for three rows. 6.9.2 Deleting rows Delete rows. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where the row is deleted. 2. To delete multiple rows, drag the cursor and set the range corresponding to the number of rows to be deleted. The rows in the set range are deleted. To delete a single row, it is not necessary to set the range. The row at the cursor position is deleted. Drag 6 - 42 6.9.2 Deleting rows 6.9 Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns 3. 1 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete Row]. OVERVIEW The rows are deleted. 6.9.3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 Inserting columns Insert columns. Columns are inserted through the whole rows of ladder block. 3 1. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Operating procedure Move the cursor to the position where a column is inserted. A column is inserted in front of the cursor position. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 To insert multiple columns, drag the cursor and set the range corresponding to the number of columns to be inserted. The columns in the set range are inserted. On the screen image below, the range for inserting three columns is set. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 Drag EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 2. SETTING LABELS 5 6.9.3 Inserting columns 6 - 43 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 3. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Insert Column]. The columns are inserted. The screen image below shows the insertion of three columns. 6.9.4 Deleting columns Delete columns. Columns are deleted within the ladder block. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where the column is deleted. 2. To delete multiple columns, drag the cursor to set the range corresponding to the number of columns to be deleted. The columns in the set range are deleted. To delete a single column, it is not necessary to set the range. The column at the cursor position is deleted. Drag 6 - 44 6.9.4 Deleting columns 6.9 Inserting and Deleting Rows and Columns 3. 1 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete Column]. OVERVIEW The following message is displayed. Click the button. The columns are deleted. The screen image below shows the deletion of three columns. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 4. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 6.9.4 Deleting columns 6 - 45 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.10 Batch Inserting and Deleting NOP Instructions Q CPU L CPU This section explains how to batch insert and delete NOP instructions. 6.10.1 Batch inserting NOP instructions Step numbers of the program can be adjusted by batch inserting NOP instructions. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where NOP instructions are inserted. NOP instructions are inserted in front of the cursor position. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [NOP Batch Insert]. The NOP Batch Insert screen is displayed. 3. Set the item on the screen. Item 4. Description Number of Insert NOPs Set the number of NOP instructions to be inserted. Maximum Number of Insert NOPs Display a maximum number of NOP instructions that can be inserted. Click the button. The set number of NOP instructions is inserted in the program. The step number is changed. 6 - 46 6.10.1 Batch inserting NOP instructions FX 6.10 Batch Inserting and Deleting NOP Instructions 6.10.2 1 Batch deleting NOP instructions OVERVIEW Batch-delete NOP instructions in the program. Operating procedure 1. 2 Select [Edit] ⇒ [NOP Batch Delete]. SCREEN CONFIGURATION The confirmation message is displayed. 2. Click the PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 button. All NOP instructions in the program are deleted. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 5 SETTING LABELS The step number is changed. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.10.2 Batch deleting NOP instructions 6 - 47 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.11 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Ladder Programs Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to cut, copy, and paste existing ladder programs. Item Toolbar Shortcut key Cut + Copy + Paste + ● Cutting/copying/pasting between different series When copying a rung element from the existing FX/A series project, and pasting it to the Q/L series project, the rung element is pasted as a Peripheral statement/note. 6.11.1 Pasting cut or copied elements in unit of instruction Paste a cut or copied element in unit of instruction. Restrictions Cutting and copying in unit of instruction are applicable to contacts, coils, application instructions, device comments, and notes. Cutting and copying are not applicable to line statements, P and I statements, and END instructions. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where the instruction is cut or copied. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Cut] ( ) or [Copy] ( ). When [Cut] ( 3. 6 - 48 ) is selected, the instruction at the cursor position is deleted. Move the cursor to the position where the cut or copied instruction is pasted. 6.11.1 Pasting cut or copied elements in unit of instruction 6.11 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Ladder Programs 4. 1 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Paste] ( ). OVERVIEW The element is pasted. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 ● Pasting in the 'Insert mode' A row is inserted at the cursor position and the element is pasted there. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Pasting position PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.11.1 Pasting cut or copied elements in unit of instruction 6 - 49 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.11.2 Pasting cut or copied elements by setting a range Paste cut or copied elements by setting a range. Operating procedure 1. Set the range by dragging the cursor from the start position of cut or copy. Drag 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Cut] ( ) or [Copy] ( ). When [Cut] ( ) is selected, the elements in the set range are deleted. 3. Move the cursor to the position where the cut or copied elements are pasted. 4. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Paste] ( ). The elements are pasted. 6 - 50 6.11.2 Pasting cut or copied elements by setting a range 6.11 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Ladder Programs 6.11.3 1 Pasting cut or copied ladder blocks OVERVIEW Paste a cut or copied ladder block. Operating procedure 2 Move the cursor on a step number of ladder block to be cut or pasted. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 1. For selecting multiple ladder blocks, specify the range by dragging the cursor down from the start position of cut or copy. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Drag SETTING LABELS 5 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Cut] ( ) or [Copy] ( ). When [Cut] ( Move the cursor to the position where the cut or copied ladder block is pasted. 7 The position where a step number is displayed can be the pasting position. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 3. ) is selected, the ladder block in the set range is deleted. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 2. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 6.11.3 Pasting cut or copied ladder blocks 6 - 51 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 4. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Paste] ( ). The ladder block is pasted. 6 - 52 6.11.3 Pasting cut or copied ladder blocks 6.11 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Ladder Programs 1 OVERVIEW ● The range can be set by pressing the + keys. Shift SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 + ● Pasting in the 'Insert mode' Elements are inserted above the cursor position. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 [Cut] or [Copy] PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Pasting position SETTING LABELS 5 [Paste] ● If elements shown below are selected by setting a range, the vertical line on the right side cannot be copied or pasted. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 The vertical line on the right side is not pasted. In such a case, set the range as shown below to copy or paste the elements. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.11.3 Pasting cut or copied ladder blocks 6 - 53 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.11.4 Pasting ladder blocks consecutively Increment a device number of device in the cut/copied ladder block, and paste consecutively. Cut/copy, and select [Edit] ⇒ [Continuous Paste]. The device numbers are incremented, and pasted for the specified number of times. The following explains how to paste in unit of ladder block consecutively. Operating procedure 1. Cut/copy a ladder block to be pasted consecutively. For details of method for cutting/copying, refer to Section 6.11.3. 2. Move the cursor to the position to be pasted. Pasting position 3. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Continuous Paste]. The Continuous Paste screen is displayed. 6 - 54 6.11.4 Pasting ladder blocks consecutively 6.11 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Ladder Programs 1 Set the items on the screen. 5. Description Number of Pasting Operations Enter the number of ladder blocks to be pasted consecutively. Copy Source Device Display devices in the cut/copied ladder block. After Increment The device number of devices listed on "Copy Source Device" are incremented for the value entered to "Increment Value" are displayed. Display "?" when a device after increment is out of device range, or within the range of automatically assigned device. Increment Value Enter a value of device number increment. 1 or more: increment the device number. 0: do not change the device number. -1 or less: decrement the device number. Click the OVERVIEW Item 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 4. button. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE The ladder block is pasted under the cursor position. The following is an example when "Number of Pasting Operations" is set to 2. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 SETTING LABELS 5 Screen button When multiple devices are cut/copied, displays the screen to set the number of increments of all the devices displayed on "Copy Source Device" in batch. button. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Enter the number of increments, and click the EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 ● 6.11.4 Pasting ladder blocks consecutively 6 - 55 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● Pasting function blocks consecutively When multiple function blocks exist in a cut/copied ladder block, the Edit FB Instance Name screens for the number of cut/copied function blocks are displayed after setting the consecutive pasting. ● When canceling the consecutive pasting of function blocks When multiple function blocks exist in a cut/copied ladder block, cancel only with the first Edit FB Instance Name screen as shown in the example below. Example: When copying a ladder block where function blocks exist, and setting "Number of Pasting Operations" to 2. Cancellation can be executed only with the Edit FB Instance Name screen of 1 and 3. First consecutive pasting Cancel Second consecutive pasting Cancel 6 - 56 6.11.4 Pasting ladder blocks consecutively 6.11 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Ladder Programs ■ 1 Considerations for consecutive pasting Example: When copying a ladder block with BL100\S8, and setting "Number of Pasting Operations" to 3. Consecutively pasted ladder blocks The number of contacts is 1 (8 characters). 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Copied ladder block 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION When the number of device characters changes from the number of contacts of copied ladder block by increment, it cannot be pasted consecutively. In this case, cancel the consecutive pasting, correct the number of device characters after pasting, and execute "Continuous Paste" again. OVERVIEW The following explains the considerations for consecutive pasting. The number of contacts is 2 (9 characters). Operation 1. The consecutive pasting is canceled, and the following message is displayed. , and paste up to BL100\S9. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Select 5 SETTING LABELS The number of device characters is changed from 8 to 9, and the number of contacts is changed from 1 to 2 by incrementing from BL100\S8 to BL100\S10. Therefore, the consecutive pasting is canceled. If canceled, execute the consecutive pasting with the following procedure. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 6.11.4 Pasting ladder blocks consecutively 6 - 57 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 2. Copy a ladder block with BL100\S9, and execute the consecutive pasting. Set "Increment Value" of BL100\S9 to 0. Copied ladder block Set the number of increments to 0. 3. Correct BL100\S9 to BL100\S10 with a ladder block after pasting. 4. Copy a ladder block with BL100\S10, and execute "Continuous Paste" again. Execute "Continuous Paste". 6 - 58 6.11.4 Pasting ladder blocks consecutively 6.11 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Ladder Programs 6.11.5 1 Copying elements and devices simultaneously OVERVIEW When pasting copied elements to the program, paste the device comments of the elements simultaneously. Operating procedure Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Comment". 2. Select "Copy device comment in copying ladder". <Copy source program> 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 1. <Copy destination program> PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Copy <Device comments of copy destination program> 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS <Device comments of copy source program> The device comments are pasted. SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6.11.5 Copying elements and devices simultaneously 6 - 59 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.12 Canceling Previous Operation Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to cancel the previous operation to restore the previous status. Item Toolbar Shortcut key + Undo Operating procedure • Select [Edit] ⇒ [Undo] ( ) immediately after editing a ladder program. The processing status just before the last operation is restored. This operation is valid for up to 30 times only when the program is in the editing status before the ladder conversion. 6.12.1 Operation applicability The following table shows the operation applicability of the Undo function. Operation applicability of the Undo function Create and delete contacts, coils, and application instructions Insert and delete rows Insert and delete columns Edit and delete lines Enter and delete vertical lines Reference Section 6.2 Section 6.7 Section 6.9 Section 6.6 Section 6.8 Enter and delete horizontal lines Section 6.6.2 Section 6.8.2 Cut and paste by setting ranges Section 6.11 ● Canceling previous operation • When a program is edited after selecting [Edit] ⇒ [Restore After Ladder Conversion] The processing status just after selecting the [Restore After Ladder Conversion] function can be restored. • When an inline structured text box is deleted, the undo operation can be performed only once. When the ladder program is edited after the delete operation, the processing status just after the deleting operation can be restored. • The undo operation cannot be performed in any of the following situations. • An unconverted ladder program is discarded and does not exist. • An inline structured text box is inserted. • A program in an inline structured text box is edited. (Only when the inline structured text program is edited for the first time after any editing is performed on the program, or after converting the program.) • An error occurred when editing a program. When the ladder program is edited after the error occurrence, the processing status just after the error occurrence can be restored. • A program is copied. 6 - 60 6.12.1 Operation applicability 6.13 Restoring Ladder Programs to the Status of After Conversion Restoring Ladder Programs to the Status of After Conversion Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to restore the currently edited ladder programs to the status of immediately after the ladder conversion. 1. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Operating procedure 1 OVERVIEW 6.13 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Restore After Ladder Conversion]. The confirmation message is displayed. 2. Click the PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 button. The ladder program is restored to the status before editing the program. 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Status after ladder conversion SETTING LABELS 5 Edit the program. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 Execute [Restore After Ladder Conversion]. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE ● Converted ladder programs cannot be restored to the status before conversion. 6 - 61 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6.14 Considerations for Editing Ladder Programs Q CPU L CPU FX The following explains the considerations for editing ladder programs. 1) For a program with a ladder block consisting of two or more lines, if one instruction cannot be fitted in a single line, create wrapping symbols and create the instruction in the next line as shown below. For creating wrapping symbols, refer to the following section. Section 6.2.7 “Creating wrapping lines” Example: To enter the following instruction: ECALL "abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw" P1000 ZR111111 ZR222222 ZR333333 ZR444444 ZR555555 An instruction that does not fit in a line cannot be entered in the line . If attempted, the error message is displayed. 1 Wrapping the line by creating the wrapping symbols. 1 Create a wrapping destination symbol (>-). Enter the instruction in the line . 2 6 - 62 Create a wrapping source symbol (->). 6.14 Considerations for Editing Ladder Programs Example) To enter "LD X11" to the first column. The contact cannot be inserted in the first column of the line of . If attempted, the error message is displayed. 1 OVERVIEW If wrapping occurs due to the insertion of a contact in the first column, a contact cannot be inserted. In this case, move the element to the next line and insert the contact in the first column after connecting the contact with the wrapping symbols. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 A contact cannot be inserted in the first column because there is no space in the line. Move the element to the next line. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 SETTING LABELS 5 Create a wrapping source symbol (->). 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Create a wrapping destination symbol (>-). 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Insert a contact. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 2) 6 - 63 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 3) When there are two or more wrapping lines, an instruction that causes more wrapping cannot be created. In this case, insert a new line below the existing lines and enter the instruction in that line. Then, adjust the wrapping symbol numbers. Example) To enter the following instruction: ECALL "abcdefg" P1000 ZR1000000 ZR1000001 ZR1000002 ZR1000003 ZR1000004 An instruction that does not fit in a line cannot be created in the line If attempted, the error message is displayed. 1 In this case, insert a new line and enter the instruction. Instruction Create the wrapping source symbol ( ) in the line , and create the wrapping destination symbol ( ) in the line . 2 3 Create a wrapping destination symbol (>-). 6 - 64 Create a wrapping source symbol (->). 6.14 Considerations for Editing Ladder Programs Example) A column is inserted in front of [X0F] 1 OVERVIEW If a ladder program is edited (such as insertion and deletion of columns) in the middle step of a wrapped line, the line may not be wrapped correctly, which causes the conversion impossible. If this happens, make corrections so that the wrapping source symbol ( ) number and the wrapping destination symbol ( ) number match correctly. Column inserting position Middle step SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 Head step 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Last step Wrapping source symbol ( ) K4 and wrapping destination symbol ( ) K4 are automatically created. This causes matching failure between the wrapping source symbol ( ) K1 and the wrapping destination symbol ( ) K1. Head step 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4) SETTING LABELS 5 Middle step 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Last step EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6 - 65 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS In this case, a correction needs to be made to the program so that the wrapping destination symbol ( ) K1 corresponds to the wrapping source symbol ( ) K1. Move the line below the line . Head step Middle step Last step Insert a new line to , and create the wrapping source symbol ( ) with K5 and wrapping destination symbol ( ) with K3. 3 6 - 66 6.14 Considerations for Editing Ladder Programs 1 OVERVIEW Change the wrapping symbol of the line to K5. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 4 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS With the corrections above, correspondence between the wrapping source symbols ( ) and the wrapping destination symbols ( ) is secured. SETTING LABELS 5 A contact or a column cannot be inserted in the middle of an instruction statement. If attempted, the error message is displayed. 7 Neither a contact nor a column can be inserted in front of 'X2' and 'X3', because it cuts in the middle of the instruction above. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Example 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 5) EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 6 - 67 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6) When the ladder block is displayed in yellow, it indicates that the ladder block cannot be displayed properly or an error exists in the program. In this case, perform the program check or compilation to check the error, and correct the program. Example 6 - 68 6.15 Changing T/C Setting Values 1 Changing T/C Setting Values Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to display setting values of timer/counter used in the ladder/SFC (Zoom) program, and changing them in batch. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Screen display OVERVIEW 6.15 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Change TC Setting]. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE List of timer/counter PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Operating procedure Set the items on the screen. Program Name Select a program name whose setting values to be changed by clicking List of timer/counter Display a list of timer/counter of the program selected for "Program Name". Position Display step numbers of timer/counter used in the program. Device/Label Display devices/labels of timer/counter. Setting Value before Change Display the setting values of timer/counter currently set. Setting Value after Change Enter the setting values of timer/counter to be changed. Write changed program to PLC*1 , *2 *1 : *2 : 2. 5 Description . SETTING LABELS Item 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 1. Select this to write the changes to the programmable controller CPU. This item cannot be selected after compiling all programs. For details, refer to Point in this section. For considerations when compiling all programs, refer to Section 10.3.3. For FXCPU, this item can be set only for ladder programs of the project without labels. Click the 7 button. Click the button. The setting values are changed. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 3. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS The message shown on the right is displayed. 6 - 69 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● Changing setting values • Constants can be changed to devices, and devices can be changed to constants. For the high-speed counter of FXCPU, changing from constants to devices and from devices to constants cannot be performed online. Example: K10 to D0 • When a ZR device is set or changed, the changed setting value cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU. Example) ZR100 to D100 cannot be set. ● For Basic model QCPU When the date of the personal computer is February 29, the TC setting values may not be changed. For measures when the TC values cannot be changed, refer to GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common). ● For Universal model QCPU/LCPU • Whether to transfer content of the program cache memory to the program memory after setting TC values, can be selected by setting the option. Select "Transfer program cache memory to program memory" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Online Change". • The following functions cannot be executed while transferring the program memory after the TC setting value change. • Online program change (ladder program, SFC (Zoom) program, ST program, function block)*1 • TC setting value change (When "Write changed program to PLC" is selected)*1 • • • • • Write to PLC function (When program memory/device memory is the target memory)*1 Program memory batch transfer Set as default connection Change PLC Type function Parameter check *1 : For Universal model QCPU with a serial number of which the first five digits are 12012 or higher, the program memory batch transfer operation can be suspended. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) ● Saving project automatically after writing program with changed TC setting values to the programmable controller CPU Projects can be saved automatically after the Online program change by setting the option. Select "Save project after changes in TC setting values are written to PLC" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Project" ⇒ "Automatic Save". ● "Write changed program to PLC" check box When the check box of "Write changed program to PLC" is disabled after compiling all programs, select [Online] ⇒ [Write to PLC] and write programs to the programmable controller CPU to validate the check box. 6 - 70 6.16 Writing/Reading List Format Programs 1 Writing/Reading List Format Programs Q CPU L CPU FX The following explains how to write/read a program to/from CSV file in a list format. This function is supported by ladder program in Simple project (without labels). SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 Writing programs in list format ■ Write a program to a CSV file in a list format. Operating procedure 1. OVERVIEW 6.16 3 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Write to CSV File]. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE The confirmation message for writing data is displayed. 2. Click the PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 button. The Write to CSV File screen is displayed. SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 3. Enter a file name of the data to be saved. 4. Click the EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 button. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE The program is saved in the CSV file in a list format. 6 - 71 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Reading program in list format ■ Read a program saved in a list format from a CSV file, and display in ladder program. Operating procedure 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Read from CSV File]. The Read from CSV File screen is displayed. 2. Select a file to be read. 3. Click the button. The confirmation message for reading data is displayed. 4. Click the button. The program is read from a CSV file, and displayed in ladder program. 6 - 72 6.16 Writing/Reading List Format Programs 1 Setting extended settings ■ OVERVIEW Set a conversion type if an instruction error occurs when reading a program saved in a list format. Screen display button on the confirmation message for reading data. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Select the PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Operating procedure 1. Set an items on the screen. Item 5 Description 2. Click the SETTING LABELS Conversion Method for Incorrect Instruction Select a conversion type when an instruction error occurs. button. Return to the confirmation message for reading data. Screen button 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● Sets the items of extended setting to the default. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 6 - 73 GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ■ Formatting CSV file The saved CSV file is displayed as shown below when it is opened with Excel. < Ladder editor > < CSV file > Project name PC information Header Instruction list ● Details of CSV file The following explains the details of CSV file format. • The file format is Unicode (including UTF-16, Little Endian, and BOM). • The delimiter of items is a tab (\t). • Each item is enclosed in double quotation marks ("). • If the item contains double quotation marks ("), the double quotation marks in the item are expressed as two double quotation marks (""). • A line feed is set at the end of the line. The line feed code is CR + LF. ● Compatibility with GX Converter The following are the considerations for using GX Converter. • When using a CSV file created with GX Converter in GX Works2, correct to the format shown above. If programs exist in the first 3 rows, insert 3 blank rows. Otherwise those programs are skipped. • When using CSV file written with GX Works2 in GX Converter, delete the first 3 rows, and save in ANSI format. 6 - 74 6.17 Setting Program Linkage Order (FXCPU) Q CPU L CPU FX For FXCPU Simple projects (with labels), execution program can be divided into multiple programs in unit of processes. These programs are linked as one program when writing them to a programmable controller CPU. This section explains how to set the linkage order. For creating a new program, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Program linkage order setting MAIN1 MAIN MAIN2 MAIN3 1 MAIN3 2 MAIN1 3 MAIN2 2 3 Link Write to PLC PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE No. Program name OVERVIEW 1 Setting Program Linkage Order (FXCPU) SCREEN CONFIGURATION 6.17 MAIN 4 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 5 Maximum of 64 programs Screen display 5 SETTING LABELS Select Project view ⇒ "Program Setting" ⇒ "Execution Program" ⇒ "MAIN". Right-click and select [Program Linkage Order Setting] from the shortcut menu. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 • Select a row and click the order. / button to change the 6 - 75 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 Operating procedure GX Works2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Screen button ● Displays the Specify Move Destination screen. Specify the destination for program to be moved. Operation 1. Set the items on the screen. Item Description Moving Source Range Select a first program and end program of moving source range. Move Destination Select a program of move destination, or "Move to End". 2. Click the button. The programs selected for "Moving Source Range" are moved to the rows above the program selected for "Move Destination". When "Move to End" is selected for "Move Destination", the programs are moved to the rows below the end row. ● Searches FEND, SRET, and IRET instructions in each program. When the instructions exist in the programs, "*" symbols are displayed on the "FEND" or "SRET/ IRET" column on the Program Linkage Order Setting screen. ● Number of programs that can be created A maximum number of programs that can be created is 64. ● Subroutine and interrupt programs When creating a subroutine or an interrupt program individually, set the linkage order to execute those programs after the FEND instruction. ● Program condition after linkage order change After the linkage order is changed on the Program Linkage Order Setting screen, all programs are in the uncompiled status. ● Security setting The access authority cannot be set for the program linkage order setting. 6 - 76 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 7 OVERVIEW 1 This chapter explains the functions of the program editor for editing SFC programs. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 List of SFC Elements 7-2 7.2 Difference between MELSAP3 and MELSAP-L 7-6 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams 7-9 7.4 Deleting SFC Diagrams 7 - 27 5 7.5 Changing SFC Step Attributes 7 - 29 7.6 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting SFC Diagrams 7 - 30 7.7 Sorting SFC Step/Transition Numbers 7 - 32 7.8 Redisplaying SFC Diagrams 7 - 33 7.9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions 7 - 34 7.10 Setting Block Information 7 - 41 7.11 Displaying SFC Block List 7 - 43 7.12 Setting Parameters for SFC Programs 7 - 47 7.13 Considerations for Creating Programs in MELSAP-L 7 - 50 7.14 Changing T/C Setting Values 7 - 52 SETTING LABELS 7.1 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7-1 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.1 List of SFC Elements Q CPU L CPU FX The following tables show the list of elements used in SFC programs. ■ QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU Category MELSAP-L 0 0 Dummy initial step 0 0 0 0 0 0 Stored operation - without transition check SFC step 0 Stored operation - with transition check 0 0 Reset initial step 0 Sn 0 Sn Initial step i i Dummy initial step i i i i i i Stored operation - with transition check i i Reset initial step i Sn i Sn Step i i Dummy step i i Stored coil initial step i i Stored operation - without transition check i i i i Reset step i Sn i Sn Block start step (with END check) i Bm i Bm Block start step (without END check) i Bm i Bm Stored coil initial step Stored operation - without transition check Stored operation - with transition check End step 7-2 MELSAP3 Initial step Stored coil initial step SFC step Symbol Name Initial step other than SFC step 0 Other than initial step Remarks Any one of these steps in a single block Initial step number at top left (first column) is fixed to 0. n: Reset destination step number Up to the total of 31 steps in a single block i: Step number (1 to 511) n: Reset destination step number Including initial steps, up to 512 steps in a single block (128 steps for Basic model QCPU) i: Step number (1 to 511) n: Reset destination step number m: Start destination step number Multiple steps can be applied in a single block 7.1 List of SFC Elements Series transition 1 Symbol Name MELSAP3 MELSAP-L a Remarks a OVERVIEW Category Selection divergence a b a b a b a b a b a b n n Simultaneous convergence simultaneous divergence Simultaneous convergence selection divergence Selection divergence simultaneous divergence a a a a a, b: Transition condition number 4 5 b a a b a b a b Jump b a j a j b a j a j a: Transition condition number j: Jump destination step number 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Simultaneous convergence selection convergence EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Transition a PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Simultaneous convergence a PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Simultaneous divergence 3 SETTING LABELS Selection convergence simultaneous divergence SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 Selection convergence 7-3 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Category Symbol Name MELSAP3 End step transition a Simultaneous convergence - jump a Simultaneous convergence selection divergence jump a Simultaneous Transition convergence selection convergence - jump MELSAP-L a a j j a a j a j+2 Selection convergence - jump 7-4 a b j+2 j j+2 j+1 a b j j j+1 j+1 a, b: Transition condition number j: Jump destination step number b j b j+1 j a b j b j j a j j b j Selection divergence jump Remarks j+2 b j j 7.1 List of SFC Elements 1 FXCPU Ladder block Remarks Up to 11 blocks in a block list LD Initial step One step in each block i: Step number (0 to 9) i Step Up to 512 steps in each block i: Step number (10 to 999) i i Step Series transition Selection divergence (Center) 3 (Right edge) Selection convergence (Left edge) (Center) (Right edge) 4 (Left edge) (Center) (Right edge) (Left edge) (Center) (Right edge) PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Transition Simultaneous divergence Simultaneous convergence 5 i JUMP transition j i: Step number j: Jump destination step number j i Self reset j EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Reset JUMP 2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE (Left edge) OVERVIEW Symbol SCREEN CONFIGURATION Ladder Name SETTING LABELS Category 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE ■ 7-5 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.2 Difference between MELSAP3 and MELSAP-L Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains the difference between MELSAP3 and MELSAP-L. A display format can be selected for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU. For details, refer to Section 2.3.7. ■ MELSAP3 MELSAP3 is a description format which provides easy-to-understand configurations and controls of an entire program by describing the operating order of machines and equipment using SFC diagrams and creating operation outputs and transition conditions using ladder programs. Machine operation flow chart Process start-up operation [SFC diagram] [Ladder diagram of operation outputs and transition conditions for each step] Activation switch Work detection Conveyor activation X0 X1 Initial step Y20 1 operation unit Pallet detection X2 Transition condition 0 Pallet positioning Clamping operation 1 operation unit Tran Pallet clamp Y21 Step 1 Clamp confirmation X3 Transition condition 1 Tran Drill rotation Y22 Y22 M0 Operation sequence Drilling process 1 operation unit Step 2 PLS M0 Drill descent SET Y23 X4 Drill descent edge position RST Y23 K20 T0 Drill ascent T0 SET Y24 Drill ascent edge position X5 Transition condition 2 Tran Pallet unclamp Y25 Unclamping operation Work transportation Y25 1 operation unit Step 3 PLS M1 M1 RST Y24 X6 Unclamp confirmation Conveyor activation Y20 Transition condition 3 Process completion 1 operation unit X7 Work transportation confirmation Tran End step SFC program 7-6 7.2 Difference between MELSAP3 and MELSAP-L 1 OVERVIEW Create programs on the SFC editor window and the Zoom editor window when displaying SFC programs in MELSAP3. Edit SFC diagrams on the SFC editor window and create operation output/transition condition programs on the Zoom editor window. MELSAP3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 < MELSAP-L side > The operrration flow is easy to understand by creating S SFC programs relating to interlock conditions. Step Write a complica atted interlock ccondition in Ladder Diagram. aX0 Start oM70 Ascent aX1 Ascent end position < Sequence program side > Program components can be established by creating programs contain interlock conditions regardless of the operation flow. Ascent end Emergency Ascent Descent position stop Y10 Descent end Emergency Descent Ascent position stop Y11 Ascent 6 A program m component is establisshed. Descent 7 oM80 Descent EDITING SFC PROGRAMS aX2 Descent esce end e d position pos o Machine controls 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Machine operation sequence 5 SETTING LABELS MELSAP-L is a description format which supports development efficiency of sequence programming and establishment of program components. Each machine control command can be established as a component by describing operation flow and machine controls separately, as in describing a machine operation sequence in MELSAP-L and controls with machine interlocks in sequence program. Furthermore, since output conditions such as interlocks cannot be written in MELSAP-L steps, a corrective action can be performed instantly for a such trouble in which the step output cannot be detected even though the step is activated. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 MELSAP-L EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ■ 7-7 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Create programs using only the SFC editor window when displaying SFC programs in MELSAP-L. Both operations of editing SFC diagrams and creating operation output/transition condition programs are performed on the SFC editor window. ● MELSAP-L (instruction format) A format to describe control instructions and transition conditions in steps on the SFC diagram. Control programs and transition conditions can be checked on the SFC diagram. ● MELSAP-L (start conditions format) A format to describe start conditions and transition conditions in steps on the SFC diagram. Operation outputs (OUT) and transition conditions (LD, LDI) can be easily entered using only devices/labels, and they can be checked on the SFC diagram. MELSAP-L (instruction format) 7-8 MELSAP-L (start conditions format) 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams This section explains how to create SFC diagrams. For FXCPU, a ladder block to activate the initial step of SFC program needs to be created separately from the SFC diagram. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) SFC elements are entered by using the Enter SFC Symbol screen. SFC elements also can be entered by using the toolbar and shortcut keys. The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys. Block Start Step (with END Check) Edit Line Jump END Step Transition Selection Divergence 4 Simultaneous Divergence Selection Convergence Simultaneous Convergence + No Attribute + Stored Coil + Stored Operation (without Transition Check) + Stored Operation (with Transition Check) + Reset + Vertical Line Segment + Selection Divergence + Simultaneous Divergence + Selection Convergence + Simultaneous Convergence + 5 SETTING LABELS Vertical Line 6 + Delete Line Documentation + PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Dummy Step 3 + EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS SFC Step Attribute Shortcut key Step Block Start Step (without END Check) SFC Symbol Toolbar SFC Step/Transition Comment 7 Sort SFC Step No. SFC Auto Scroll EDITING SFC PROGRAMS View SFC All Block Batch Monitoring Zoom 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Monitor 2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Item OVERVIEW 1 Creating SFC Diagrams SCREEN CONFIGURATION 7.3 7-9 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.3.1 Entering SFC steps ()/()/() Q CPU L CPU Enter an SFC step. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where an SFC step is entered. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [Step]/[Dummy Step]. The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen is displayed according to the display format setting. <MELSAP3/FXCPU> SFC step number <MELSAP-L (instruction format)> SFC step number <MELSAP-L (start conditions format)> SFC step number 7 - 10 7.3.1 Entering SFC steps ()/()/() FX 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams 1 Set the items on the screen. Select "STEP" or "DUMMY". Dummy steps are changed to the SFC step display automatically when the operation output program is created. SFC step number Enter an SFC step number. Step Attribute Select the SFC step attribute. This setting can be set when "STEP" is selected for "Symbol". Reset*1 Enter a reset destination step number when the reset step "R" is selected for "Step Attribute". Comment Enter SFC step comments. Up to 32 characters can be entered. The created comments can be displayed by selecting [View] ⇒ [SFC Step/Transition Comment]. Program*2 Enter programs. For entering MELSAP-L programs, refer to the following section. (Section 7.9.2, Section 7.9.3) 2 3 Not supported by FXCPU. Applicable to MELSAP-L (instruction format) and MELSAP-L (start conditions format). Click the OVERVIEW Symbol *1 : *2 : 4. Description SCREEN CONFIGURATION Item PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3. button. The entered SFC step element is displayed. 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS <Overwrite mode> Enter SFC step 1 SETTING LABELS 5 <Insert mode> 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Enter SFC step 3 A vertical line is inserted automatically to the other divergence 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE ● Changing the SFC step attributes The SFC step attributes of created SFC steps can be changed by selecting [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Step Attribute] ⇒ [(SFC step attribute)]. (Section 7.5) EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 7.3.1 Entering SFC steps ()/()/() 7 - 11 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.3.2 Entering block start steps ()/() Q CPU L CPU FX Enter a block start step. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where a block start step is entered. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [Block Start Step (with END Check)]/[Block Start Step (without END Check)]. The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen is displayed according to the display format setting. <MELSAP3/FXCPU> SFC step number 3. Set the items on the screen. Item 4. Description Symbol Select "BLOCK" or "BLOCK-S". SFC step number Enter an SFC step number. Step Attribute (This setting is not required.) Block Enter a start destination block number. Comment Enter SFC step comments. Up to 32 characters can be entered. Click the button. The entered block start step element is displayed. <Overwrite mode> Enter block start step 1 <Insert mode> Enter block start step 3 A vertical line is inserted automatically to the other divergence 7 - 12 7.3.2 Entering block start steps ()/() 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams 1 Entering series transitions () Q CPU L CPU FX Enter a series transition. Operating procedure OVERVIEW 7.3.3 1. Move the cursor to the position where a series transition is entered. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [Transition]. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen is displayed according to the display format setting. 3 <MELSAP3/FXCPU> PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Transition number PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 <MELSAP-L (instruction format)> Transition number SETTING LABELS 5 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS <MELSAP-L (start conditions format)> Transition number EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7.3.3 Entering series transitions () 7 - 13 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 3. Set the items on the screen. Item Symbol Select "TR". Transition number Enter a transition number. Step Attribute (This setting is not required.) Block (This setting is not required.) Comment*1 Enter transition comments. Up to 32 characters can be entered. Program*2 Enter programs. For entering MELSAP-L programs, refer to the following section. (Section 7.9) *1 : *2 : 4. Description Not supported by FXCPU. Applicable to MELSAP-L (instruction format) and MELSAP-L (start conditions format). Click the button. The entered series transition element is displayed. <Overwrite mode> Enter transition 1 <Insert mode> Enter transition 3 A vertical line is inserted automatically to the other divergence 7 - 14 7.3.3 Entering series transitions () 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams 1 Entering selection divergences () Q CPU L CPU FX Enter a selection divergence. Operating procedure OVERVIEW 7.3.4 1. Move the cursor to the position where a selection divergence is entered. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [Selection Divergence]. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen is displayed according to the display format setting. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Number of divergences Set the items on the screen. Item Select "--D". Number of divergences Enter a number of columns of divergence line. Step Attribute (This setting is not required.) Block (This setting is not required.) Comment (This setting is not required.) Click the 5 button. The entered selection divergence element is displayed. <Overwrite mode> 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Enter a selection divergence <Insert mode> 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Enter a selection divergence 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 4. Description Symbol SETTING LABELS 3. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 7.3.4 Entering selection divergences () 7 - 15 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.3.5 Entering simultaneous divergences () Q CPU L CPU Enter a simultaneous divergence. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where a simultaneous divergence is entered. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [Simultaneous Divergence]. The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen is displayed according to the display format setting. <MELSAP3/FXCPU> Number of divergences 3. Set the items on the screen. Item 4. Description Symbol Select "==D". Number of divergences Enter a number of columns of divergence line. Step Attribute (This setting is not required.) Block (This setting is not required.) Comment (This setting is not required.) Click the button. The entered simultaneous divergence element is displayed. <Overwrite mode> Enter a simultaneous divergence <Insert mode> Enter a simultaneous divergence 7 - 16 7.3.5 Entering simultaneous divergences () FX 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams 1 Entering selection convergences () Q CPU L CPU FX Enter a selection convergence. Operating procedure OVERVIEW 7.3.6 1. Move the cursor to the position where a selection convergence is entered. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [Selection Convergence]. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen is displayed according to the display format setting. 3 <MELSAP3/FXCPU> PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Number of convergences Set the items on the screen. Symbol Select "--C". Number of convergences Enter a number of columns of convergence line. Step Attribute (This setting is not required.) Block (This setting is not required.) Comment (This setting is not required.) Click the 5 button. The entered selection convergence element is displayed. <Overwrite mode> 6 Enter a selection convergence EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 4. Description SETTING LABELS Item EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 3. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 7.3.6 Entering selection convergences () 7 - 17 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS <Insert mode> Enter a selection convergence 7 - 18 7.3.6 Entering selection convergences () 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams Q CPU L CPU FX Enter a simultaneous convergence. Operating procedure OVERVIEW 1 Entering simultaneous convergences () 2 1. Move the cursor to the position where a simultaneous convergence is entered. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [Simultaneous Convergence]. The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen is displayed according to the display format setting. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 7.3.7 3 <MELSAP3/FXCPU> PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Number of convergences Set the items on the screen. Item Symbol Select "==C". Number of convergences Enter a number of columns of convergence line. Step Attribute (This setting is not required.) Block (This setting is not required.) Comment (This setting is not required.) Click the 5 button. The entered simultaneous convergence element is displayed. 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS <Overwrite mode> 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Enter a simultaneous convergence 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 4. Description SETTING LABELS 3. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 7.3.7 Entering simultaneous convergences () 7 - 19 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS <Insert mode> Enter a simultaneous convergence 7 - 20 7.3.7 Entering simultaneous convergences () 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams ● Entering a divergence and a convergence in a single transition at the same time Reserve the area for one step using "|" (vertical line), then enter a divergence or convergence element. A vertical line can be inserted by selecting [Edit] ⇒ [Insert Row]. (Section 7.3.11) Example 1 OVERVIEW 1 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 Area for 1 step PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Example 2 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Area for 1 step 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● Number of divergences/convergences when entering divergence/convergence lines By entering '-n' for the number of divergences/convergences, divergence/convergence lines can be created from right to left without changing the cursor position. ● Inserting divergences/convergences Inserting divergences/convergences may cause the SFC diagram to become a program that cannot be converted because of the combination of divergence and convergence. Edit the SFC diagram to be normal and convert the program. The following SFC diagram cannot be converted because of the combination of simultaneous divergence and selection convergence. SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7.3.7 Entering simultaneous convergences () 7 - 21 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.3.8 Entering jump transitions () Q CPU L CPU Enter a jump transition. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the position where a jump transition is entered. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [Jump]. The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen is displayed according to the display format setting. <MELSAP3/FXCPU> Jump destination step number 3. Set the items on the screen. Item 4. Description Symbol Select "JUMP". Jump destination step number Enter a jump destination step number. Step Attribute (This setting is not required.) Block (This setting is not required.) Comment (This setting is not required.) Click the button. The entered jump transition element is displayed. Enter a jump transition 7 - 22 7.3.8 Entering jump transitions () FX 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams 1 Entering end steps () Q CPU L CPU FX Enter an end step. For FXCPU, since RET or END is written automatically at the program entry (conversion), this setting is not required. 1. Move the cursor to the position where an end step is entered. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [END Step]. 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Operating procedure OVERVIEW 7.3.9 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE The Enter SFC Symbol screen or the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen is displayed according to the display format setting. <MELSAP3> SFC step number Set the items on the screen. Item SFC step number (This setting is not required.) Step Attribute (This setting is not required.) Block (This setting is not required.) Comment (This setting is not required.) Click the SETTING LABELS Select "END". 6 button. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS The entered end step element is displayed. 7 Enter an end step EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 4. 5 Description Symbol 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 3. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 7.3.9 Entering end steps () 7 - 23 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.3.10 Drawing lines Q CPU L CPU FX Draw a divergence line and a convergence line by dragging the mouse. Operating procedure 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Edit Line] ⇒ [Vertical Line Segment]/[Selection Divergence]/ [Simultaneous Divergence]/[Selection Convergence]/[Simultaneous Convergence]. 2. Drag the mouse from the start position for entering lines to the end position. When the Edit Line menu is selected, the status is remained until the same menu is selected again. Drag the mouse to the end position ● Overwriting lines Even when lines are overwritten to the created SFC steps/transitions, SFC steps/transitions and sequence programs in the operation outputs/transition conditions are not deleted. 7 - 24 7.3.10 Drawing lines 7.3 Creating SFC Diagrams 1 Inserting/deleting rows and columns Q CPU L CPU FX Insert/delete a row and a column. Operating procedure OVERVIEW 7.3.11 1. Move the cursor to the position where a row or column is inserted/deleted. 2. Execute each operation as shown below. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 <Inserting a row> PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 [Edit] ⇒ [Insert Row] PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 5 SETTING LABELS <Inserting a column> [Edit] ⇒ [Insert Column] EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7.3.11 Inserting/deleting rows and columns 7 - 25 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS <Deleting a row> [Edit] ⇒ [Delete Row] <Deleting a column> [Edit] ⇒ [Delete Column] 7 - 26 7.3.11 Inserting/deleting rows and columns 7.4 Deleting SFC Diagrams 1 Deleting SFC Diagrams Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to delete entered SFC elements. OVERVIEW 7.4 2 Deleting SFC elements by setting a range SCREEN CONFIGURATION 7.4.1 Delete SFC elements by setting a range. Operating procedure Specify the range to be deleted by dragging the cursor. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1. 3 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete]. 5 SETTING LABELS 2. Drag PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 ● Selecting a range The range can be selected by pressing the key + / / / keys. ● Deleting elements Elements can be deleted by pressing the key, or by selecting [Edit] ⇒ [Cut]. ● Canceling the previous operation After deleting elements, the editing status before the deletion is restored by selecting [Edit] ⇒ [Undo]. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7.4.1 Deleting SFC elements by setting a range 7 - 27 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.4.2 Deleting only divergence/convergence/vertical lines Delete a divergence/convergence/vertical line. Operating procedure 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete Line]. 2. Specify the range to be deleted by dragging the cursor. After dragging, the lines in the specified range are deleted. When the Delete Line menu is selected, the status is remained until the same menu is selected again. Drag 7 - 28 7.4.2 Deleting only divergence/convergence/vertical lines 7.5 Changing SFC Step Attributes Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to change the SFC step attribute. OVERVIEW 1 Changing SFC Step Attributes 2 Operating procedure Move the cursor to the SFC step whose attribute is to be changed. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Step Attribute] ⇒ [No Attribute]/[Stored Coil]/[Stored Operation (without Transition Check)]/[Stored Operation (with Transition Check)]/ [Reset]. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 7.5 [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Step Attribute] ⇒ [Stored Coil] PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 5 SETTING LABELS ● Operation output sequence program after the SFC step attribute is changed Even when the SFC step attribute is changed, the operation output sequence program already created remains as it is. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7 - 29 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.6 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting SFC Diagrams Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to cut, copy, and paste the SFC diagram. Operating procedure 1. Specify the range to be cut or copied. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Cut]/[Copy], and cut or copy the SFC diagram in the specified range. 3. Move the cursor to the position where the cut/copied SFC diagram is pasted. 4. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Paste]. The Paste Data screen is displayed. 7 - 30 7.6 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting SFC Diagrams Description Action/Transition Select this to paste the cut/copied data including operation output/transition condition sequence programs. Step and TR Comments Select this to paste the cut/copied data including SFC step/transition comments. Click the OVERVIEW Item 6. 1 Set the items on the screen. 2 button. The cut/copied SFC diagram is pasted. Note that the conversion error occurs when the divergence or convergence line is not correct after pasting data. Edit the SFC diagram and convert the program again. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 5. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 5 SETTING LABELS ● Pasting position If the start position of the cut/copied SFC diagram is an SFC step, it cannot be pasted at the position of transition, and if the start position is a transition, it cannot be pasted at the position of SFC step. Change the pasting position one row up or down, and paste the data again. ● Operation output/transition condition programs to be pasted Paste operation output/transition condition programs within approximate 2k steps. For details of maximum number of sequence steps that can be created, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC) PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7 - 31 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.7 Sorting SFC Step/Transition Numbers Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to sort SFC step/transition numbers of created SFC diagram. Screen display Select [Edit] ⇒ [Sort SFC Step No.]. Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen. Item 2. Description Sorting Order Select whether to sort SFC step/transition numbers in ascending or descending order. Change START Block Number Select this to change the start block number. Set START Block Number When "Change" is selected, set the start destination block number of the block start step that is changed when sorting SFC step/transition numbers. Click the button. The sorting of SFC step/transition numbers is executed according to the settings. ● Difference of sorting result according to the sort order The following figures show the sorting results in ascending and descending order. (Ascending order) (Descending order) 0 0 1 3 4 6 6 8 0 1 2 4 2 3 5 5 7 8 6 5 3 2 7 5 4 6 4 3 2 1 1 0 • The "Undo" operation can be performed only once immediately after the sort execution. • The initial step is always set to '0' for either ascending or descending order. ● SFC devices at the sorting operation SFC devices used for operation outputs/transition conditions (such as BLm\Sn and BLm\TRn) are not sorted. Change them using the device replacing function. 7 - 32 7.8 Redisplaying SFC Diagrams Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to delete unused vertical/divergence/convergence lines in the converted SFC diagram. If the unconverted SFC diagram is redisplayed, the unconverted SFC diagram is discarded and the latest converted status is restored. Operating procedure Select [Edit] ⇒ [Arrange SFC]. 2 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE <Deleting a row section> [Edit] ⇒ [Arrange SFC] PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 SETTING LABELS 5 <Deleting a column section> [Edit] ⇒ [Arrange SFC] EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE • OVERVIEW 1 Redisplaying SFC Diagrams SCREEN CONFIGURATION 7.8 7 - 33 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to create operation output and transition condition programs. Create operation output and transition condition programs on the Zoom editor window when editing in MELSAP3/FXCPU. Create operation output and transition condition programs on the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen when editing in MELSAP-L. 7.9.1 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP3/FXCPU) Create operation output and transition condition programs in MELSAP3/FXCPU. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the SFC step/transition where the program is created. 2. Move the cursor to the Zoom editor window. The editing operations on the Zoom editor window are the same as those of ladder editor. (Chapter 6) 7 - 34 7.9.1 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP3/FXCPU) 7.9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions SCREEN CONFIGURATION 4 To enter a dummy coil, select [Edit] ⇒ [Ladder Symbol] ⇒ [Coil], and clicking the button enters a dummy coil automatically. ● When the cursor is placed at the block start step If [View] ⇒ [Open Zoom/Start Destination Block] is selected when the cursor is placed at the block start step, the SFC diagram of the start destination block is displayed. ● Using function blocks in the Zoom editor window Only function blocks created in Ladder Diagram can be used for operation outputs. Function blocks cannot be used for transition conditions. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS ) for the coil instruction can be entered. 3 ● Cutting/copying/pasting/consecutive pasting data Data can be cut, copied, pasted, and pasted consecutively between the ladder program and the program in the Zoom editor window. However, data containing instructions, statements, and pointers that cannot be used in the Zoom editor window cannot be pasted. A ladder program containing TRAN can be pasted to transition conditions only. SETTING LABELS Only one dummy coil ( 2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ● Displaying SFC editor window and Zoom editor window By the following setting, the windows of SFC editor and the Zoom editor can be tiled automatically when the SFC editor window is opened. The display of SFC editor and Zoom editor can be selected from 'tile horizontally' or 'tile vertically'. Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "SFC 1" ⇒ "Tile SFC and Zoom vertically". When this setting is valid, the setting of "Open Zoom with New Window" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "Zoom" is invalidated. ● Moving the cursor of the SFC editor window on the Zoom editor window With the activated Zoom editor window, the cursor of the SFC editor window can be moved. Select the direction to move the cursor by selecting [View] ⇒ [Move SFC Cursor] ⇒ [Up] / [Down] / [Left] / [Right] ( + + ///). When the cursor of the SFC editor window is moved, the cursor of the Zoom editor window moves to the corresponding position. ● Opening the Zoom editor window When "Tile SFC and Zoom vertically" is not selected under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "SFC 1", the Zoom editor window can be opened by selecting [View] ⇒ [Open Zoom/Start Destination Block]. To open the Zoom, hold the key and double-click the corresponding SFC step/transition of the SFC diagram, or press the and keys. To return to the SFC diagram from the Zoom editor window, press the and keys. ● Instructions that can be used in the Zoom editor window For details of unavailable instructions for operation outputs/transition conditions, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC) Statements and pointers cannot be entered. For transition conditions, notes cannot be entered as well. ● Entering a dummy coil to transition conditions OVERVIEW 1 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS ● Editing SFC elements in MELSAP3 By the following setting, the Enter SFC Symbol screen is displayed with selecting comment or step number when editing an SFC element in MELSAP3. Select "Leave comment or step No. selected" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "SFC 2". 5 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7.9.1 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP3/FXCPU) 7 - 35 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.9.2 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP-L (instruction format)) Create operation output and transition condition programs in MELSAP-L (instruction format). For details of MELSAP-L (instruction format), refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (MELSAP-L) Screen display Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [Step]/[Dummy]/[Transition]. Operating procedure 1. Set the item on the screen. Item Program 2. Click the Description Enter an operation output or transition condition program. button. Screen button ● Executes the Online program change on the changed program. ● Displays the Instruction Help screen. (Section 6.2.2) ● Online program change after compiling all programs The Online program change cannot be performed after compiling all programs. Switch the programmable controller CPU to STOP, and perform [Online] ⇒ [Write to PLC]. For considerations for compiling all programs, refer to Section 10.3.3. 7 - 36 7.9.2 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP-L (instruction format)) 7.9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions ■ 1 Operation output programs in MELSAP-L (instruction format) : Indicates a device **: Indicates a value Instructions Format MELSAP-L description example Coil output o oY70 Set output s sM100 Reset output r rM200 Timer Counter o K** oT0 K100 oC0 K200 High-speed timer h K** hT0 K100 Instructions other than above Same as list format MOV K100 D0 Ladder program example PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Delimit with "," to write multiple operation outputs in parallel within the same step. Ladder program example 5 SETTING LABELS oY10, sM100, MOV K100 D0 ● Instructions which cannot be used in operation output programs The following are the instructions which cannot be entered to operation output programs in MELSAP-L. 6 • NOP • MPS, MRD, MPP • Contact instructions • Comparison operation instructions (such as =, <, >) ● Considerations when writing operation output programs • Write instructions which do not require an execution condition (such as DI, EI) at the last of each operation output program. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS MELSAP-L description example 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Operation output instructions are described in the following formats. Both uppercase and lowercase letters can be used. OVERVIEW ● Operation output instructions 7 Example: oY70, MOV D0 D100, DI EDITING SFC PROGRAMS • Up to 24 instructions can be written to a single operation output program. SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7.9.2 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP-L (instruction format)) 7 - 37 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS ■ Transition condition programs in MELSAP-L (instruction format) ● Transition condition instructions Transition condition instructions are described in the following formats. Both uppercase and lowercase letters can be used. : Indicates a device Instructions Format MELSAP-L description example Open contact a aX0 Closed contact b bX10 Rising pulse p pM100 Falling pulse f fM200 Contact-equivalent instruction Same as list format < D0 D100 OR | aX0 | aM0 AND & aX0 & aM0 Ladder program example ● OR and AND instructions When the OR and AND instructions are combined, the AND instruction is given the priority. Use "( )" to give the higher priority. MELSAP-L description example Ladder program example aX0 | aM0 & aX1 (aX0 | aM0) & aX1 aX0 & aX1 | aM0 & aM1 aX0 & (aX1 | aM0) & aM1 ● Instructions which cannot be used in transition condition programs The following are the instructions which cannot be entered to transition condition programs in MELSAP-L. • Instructions other than the contact instructions and comparison operation instructions 7 - 38 7.9.2 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP-L (instruction format)) 7.9 Creating Operation Outputs and Transition Conditions Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP-L (start conditions format)) Create operation output and transition condition programs in MELSAP-L (start conditions format). Screen display 1 OVERVIEW 7.9.3 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Select [Edit] ⇒ [SFC Symbol] ⇒ [Step]/[Dummy]/[Transition]. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Device/label specification PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 Operating procedure Set the items on the screen. Description Enter items for an operation output or transition condition program. Device/label specification *1 : 2. • Transition condition Set devices/labels and ON/OFF. Above Device/Label Combination Select AND or OR for each condition. Label Candidacy Display Target Data Select the corresponding data of label options displayed for device/label specification. Execute online change after converting.*1 5 • Operation output Enter devices/labels. SETTING LABELS Program 6 Select this to execute the Online program change on the changed program. This item cannot be selected after compiling all programs. For details, refer to Point in this section. For considerations when compiling all programs, refer to Section 10.3.3. Click the button. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Item 7 The program is converted and applied to the SFC diagram. ● "Execute online change after converting" check box When the check box of "Execute online change after converting" is disabled after compiling all programs, select [Online] ⇒ [Write to PLC] and write programs to the programmable controller CPU to validate the check box. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 1. SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7.9.3 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP-L (start conditions format)) 7 - 39 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS ■ Operation output programs in MELSAP-L (start conditions format) The following are the setting examples of operation output program. MELSAP-L description example ■ Ladder program example Transition condition programs in MELSAP-L (start conditions format) The following are the setting examples of transition condition program. MELSAP-L description example 7 - 40 Ladder program example 7.9.3 Creating operation output and transition condition programs (MELSAP-L (start conditions format)) 7.10 Setting Block Information 1 Setting Block Information Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to set block information. Block information is set on the Property screen of SFC block. Select the SFC block to be set on the Project view in advance. SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 Screen display Select [Project] ⇒ [Object] ⇒ [Property] ⇒ <<Details>>. < QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU> OVERVIEW 7.10 < FXCPU > PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 5 Set the items related to the block information on the screen. <<Details>> Description - 6 Title Enter the title of the SFC block. (The number of applicable characters is 32.) Block No. Specify the SFC block number. (0 to 319. Note that 0 to 127 for Q02UCPU, and 0 to 24 for FXCPU.) Block Information Enter devices/labels to the required items as block information devices. (The number of applicable characters is 32.) Enter a comment of SFC block. (The maximum number of characters is 5120.) A new line can be inserted by pressing the + keys. 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS <<Comment>> EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Item 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE • SETTING LABELS Operating procedure 7 - 41 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS ● Title of SFC block (projects without labels) The set block title is stored as a device comment of device BLm. A block title can be created/changed by entering "BLm" for the device name on the device comment editor. When setting block titles for each program, create comments by program. For creating and editing device comments, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) ● Title of SFC block (projects with labels) When the block title is set, the confirmation message asking whether to copy the block title to the device comment of device BLm is displayed. Creating device comment for the device set as BLm on the device comment editor is not applied to the block title. ● Block information • For details of functions and operations of each item, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC) • When the block information is changed in the project with labels, the program becomes uncompiled status. 7 - 42 7.11 Displaying SFC Block List 1 Displaying SFC Block List This section explains how to display the list of the SFC program block information including the SFC diagram being edited. Open the screen of the SFC diagram in advance. The following operations can be executed in SFC block list. • Creating new blocks • Setting, correcting block information • Displaying SFC diagram of specified block • Monitoring SFC block list*1 *1 : 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION • Copying, pasting in unit of block*1 OVERVIEW 7.11 Not supported by FXCPU. 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Screen display Select [View] ⇒ [Open SFC Blocklist]. < QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU> PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 < FXCPU > SETTING LABELS 5 Display contents Description No. Display "Block No." set on the Property screen of SFC block. Data Name Display the block name. Title Display "Title" set on the Property screen of SFC block. Conversion Status Displaying the conversion status of block. *: Unconverted -: Converted Block Type*1 Display either "SFC Block" or "Ladder Block". Display "Step Transition Bit" set on the Property screen of SFC block. Block PAUSE/RESTART*2 Display "Block PAUSE/RESTART Bit" set on the Property screen of SFC block. Mode*2 Number of Active Display "Pause Mode Bit" set on the Property screen of SFC block. Steps*2 Display "Number of Active Steps Register" set on the Property screen of SFC block. Continuous Transition Bit*2 Display "Continuous Transition Bit" set on the Property screen of SFC block. Comment Display "Comment" set on the Property screen of SFC block. *1 : *2 : EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Step Transition*2 Pause 7 Display "Block START/END Bit" set on the Property screen of SFC block. 8 Not supported by QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU. Not supported by FXCPU. SEARCH AND REPLACE Block Start*2 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Item 7 - 43 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.11.1 Creating blocks with SFC block list Q CPU L CPU FX Create a block on the cursor position with the SFC block list. Operating procedure • Double-click a position where a block is to be created. A block is created, and the SFC diagram is displayed. The data name of the new block is "Block*". The lowest number that is not used is assigned to "*". ● Considerations for reading a project contains an SFC program When reading an SFC program of Simple project (without labels) using the Read from PLC or the Read IC Memory Card function, the set block data name may be replaced with a default data name. 7.11.2 Copying/pasting blocks on SFC block list Q CPU L CPU Copy a block on the SFC block list, and paste it. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to a block to be copied. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Copy]. 3. Move the cursor to a position to be pasted. 4. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Paste]. The Object to Paste screen is displayed. 7 - 44 7.11.1 Creating blocks with SFC block list FX 7.11 Displaying SFC Block List 5. Select an item of pasting, and click the 1 button. OVERVIEW The Data Paste screen is displayed. 6. Enter a data name to "Data Name After Paste", and click the SCREEN CONFIGURATION 2 button. The block is pasted. 3 4 Displaying comments on SFC block list Q CPU L CPU FX Display device/label comments on the SFC block list. 5 SETTING LABELS Operating procedure • PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 7.11.3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ● Copying blocks on tree view A block copied from a tree view can be pasted to the block list. On the tree view, multiple blocks can be selected and copied simultaneously. Note that blocks which exceed the last row are deleted when pasting. Select [View] ⇒ [SFC Block List Comment]. EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 ● Displaying comments on the SFC block list Comments also can be displayed on the SFC block list by the following operation. Select "Block List" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "Comment". EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7.11.3 Displaying comments on SFC block list 7 - 45 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.11.4 Displaying devices on SFC block list Q CPU L CPU FX Display devices assigned to labels on the SFC block list. This function is available after the compilation of the SFC program. Operating procedure • Select [View] ⇒ [Device Display]. ● When SFC program becomes uncompiled status When the SFC program becomes uncompiled status, the device display is disabled. ● Displayed comments When [SFC Block List Comment] is selected, displayed comments are changed from label comments to device comments. 7.11.5 Displaying SFC diagram from SFC block list Q CPU L CPU FX Display the SFC diagram of the block at the cursor position on the SFC block list. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the block to be displayed. 2. Select [View] ⇒ [Open SFC Body], or double-click the block to be displayed. 7.11.6 Displaying Local Label Setting screen from SFC block list Q CPU L CPU Display the Local Label Setting screen of the block at the cursor position on the SFC block list. Operating procedure 7 - 46 1. Move the cursor to the block to be displayed. 2. Select [View] ⇒ [Open Header]. 7.11.4 Displaying devices on SFC block list FX 7.12 Setting Parameters for SFC Programs 1 Setting Parameters for SFC Programs Q CPU L CPU FX 7.12.1 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION This section explains how to set parameters for SFC programs among the parameter settings for operating the programmable controller CPU. OVERVIEW 7.12 SFC settings in PLC parameter Set parameters for SFC programs in PLC parameter. 3 Screen display PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Select Project view ⇒ "Parameter" ⇒ "PLC Parameter" ⇒ <<SFC>>. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 Operating procedure Set the items on the screen. 7 Description SFC Program Start Mode Select to initial start or resume start the SFC program. Start Conditions Select whether to auto-start block 0 at the initial start of the SFC program. Output Mode When the Block is Stopped Select to stop the program by turning OFF the coil outputs that are turned ON by the OUT instruction, or to stop the program while they are remained ON, when the stop operation is requested to each block. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS Item 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE • 7.12.1 SFC settings in PLC parameter 7 - 47 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.12.2 Setting the property of SFC programs Set the property of SFC programs. Screen display Select [Project] ⇒ [Object] ⇒ [Property]. The following is a screen of High Performance model QCPU. Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. Item <<Details>> Title Description Enter the title of the SFC program. (The number of applicable characters is 32.) SFC Program Type Select "Normal SFC type" or "Control SFC type". Setting*1 Periodic Execution Block*1 All blocks following the set block number become periodic execution blocks. To process all blocks in every scan, leave this field blank. The execution interval is entered within the range of 1 to 65535ms in unit of 1ms. Act at Block MultiActivated*2 When the blocks in the specified range is active, and the start operation is requested from another block, an error occurs and the operation of the programmable controller CPU stops. The operating mode at the multiple activation for blocks out of the specified range becomes 'standby'. To set the operating mode to 'standby' for all blocks, leave the start and end fields blank. Act at Step MultiActivated*1 When the multiple activation of SFC steps occurs, the SFC steps in the range specified for "Waiting Blocks" are set in standby status until the corresponding SFC steps become inactive. When the multiple activation of SFC steps occurs, the SFC steps in the range specified for "Stop Blocks" become error and the operation of the programmable controller CPU stops. When the multiple activation of SFC steps occurs, the SFC steps out of the specified range are forcibly transited. <<Comment>> Comment Explanation *1 : *2 : 7 - 48 Enter comments of the SFC program. (The maximum number of characters is 5120.) A new line can be inserted by pressing the + keys. When the cursor is placed on a setting item, an explanation of the item is displayed. Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Universal model QCPU, and LCPU. Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, Q02U, and LCPU. 7.12.2 Setting the property of SFC programs 7.12 Setting Parameters for SFC Programs 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION ● Applicable range for the set data The data set in the property of SFC program are commonly applied to all blocks in SFC programs. Specific data cannot be set for each block. ● Control SFC type program An SFC diagram can be created for the block 0 only in the control SFC type program. If a block start step is entered to the block 0, an error occurs and the programmable controller CPU stops when the program is executed. OVERVIEW 1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 7.12.2 Setting the property of SFC programs 7 - 49 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.13 Considerations for Creating Programs in MELSAP-L Q CPU L CPU FX The following explains the considerations for creating SFC programs in MELSAP-L. 1) For Simple project, either MELSAP3 or MELSAP-L format can be selected for each project. Note that however, MELSAP3 and MELSAP-L cannot be specified for each block of SFC program. For Structured project, select one format per project. 2) Contact instructions and contact-equivalent instructions cannot be entered to operation output programs. 3) Each operation output/transition condition program is displayed within 32 characters in an SFC diagram. If the program exceeds 32 characters, it is displayed up to 28th character and "..." is displayed after a space. 4) Notes cannot be created. 5) Device comments are not displayed on the SFC diagram. Device comments are edited and displayed on the device comment editor. 6) SFC programs with different display formats can be verified when a project is verified. 7) When a program created in MELSAP3 is displayed in MELSAP-L, the following operation outputs/ transition conditions are displayed in "?" marks. • Operation output/transition condition contains an NOP instruction • Operation output contains a contact instruction or contact-equivalent instruction • Operation output contains a note When "?" marks are displayed, change the format to MELSAP3 and check the ladder program. Programs created in MELSAP3 cannot be modified or monitored in MELSAP-L, however, a CPU processes them normally. To modify and monitor programs in MELSAP-L after they are checked in MELSAP3, delete programs displayed in "?" marks on the Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen and enter them again in MELSAP-L. MELSAP3 MELSAP-L 7 - 50 7.13 Considerations for Creating Programs in MELSAP-L • Transition conditions which include the instructions other than LD, AND, OR, LDI, ANI, ORI. When "?" marks are displayed, change the format to MELSAP-L (instruction format), and check the ladder program. Programs created in MELSAP-L (instruction format) cannot be modified or monitored in MELSAP-L (start conditions format), however, a CPU processes them normally. To modify and monitor programs in MELSAP-L (start conditions format) after they are checked in MELSAP-L (instruction format), delete programs displayed in "?" marks on the Enter SFC Symbol/ Enter Program screen and enter them again in MELSAP-L (start conditions format). MELSAP-L (instruction format) OVERVIEW • Operation outputs which include the instructions other than OUT 1 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION When a program created in MELSAP-L (instruction format) is displayed in MELSAP-L (start conditions format), the following operation outputs/transition conditions are displayed in "?" marks. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 MELSAP-L (start conditions format) SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8) 7 - 51 GX Works2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7.14 Changing T/C Setting Values Q CPU L CPU FX For displaying setting values of timer and counter used in SFC programs and changing them in batch, refer to the following section. Section 6.15 “Changing T/C Setting Values” 7 - 52 SEARCH AND REPLACE 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION 8 OVERVIEW 1 This chapter explains basic operations of search, replace and batch-replace functions. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 8-8 5 SETTING LABELS Searching for and Replacing Data in SFC Programs 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 8-2 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 8.2 Searching for and Replacing Data in Ladder Programs 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8.1 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS 4 8-1 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8.1 Searching for and Replacing Data in Ladder Programs Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to search for and replace the specified device, instruction, and step number. For the operations of device search/replace, instruction search/replace, and open/closed contact change functions, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) 8.1.1 Searching for devices/labels with simple search function Search for a specified device/label. Operating procedure 1. Press the key on the program editor. The Find screen is displayed. Instruction device entry field Element selection field 2. Enter a device/label to be searched. Item 3. Description Element selection field Specify an element. Click Instruction device entry field Enter an instruction, a device, or a label. The search option of digit-specified device/multiple word device can be specified when searching devices. Suffix "/K" (digitspecified device) or "/D" (multiple word device) to a search word. Click the button. The cursor is moved to the specified device or label. 8-2 8.1.1 Searching for devices/labels with simple search function to display the list of elements. 8.1 Searching for and Replacing Data in Ladder Programs Move from the device/label, contact, or coil at the cursor position to the next position where the specified device/label, contact, or coil is used with the simple shortcut key operation. The cursor can also be returned to the previous position before the [Next Device]/[Next Contact]/[Next Coil] function execution. This function can be used to search for elements during monitoring to find the cause of a problem such as when a coil is not turning ON/OFF, and return the cursor to the previous position to search for the next corresponding elements. Moving to next device ■ Operating procedure 1. Place the cursor to the device/label to be searched. 2. Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Next Device]. ( + + ) 2 3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Move from the device/label at the cursor position to the next position where the specified device/label is used. OVERVIEW 1 Moving to specified device/label SCREEN CONFIGURATION 8.1.2 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS The cursor moves to the searched device/label. SETTING LABELS 5 Move from the device/label at the cursor position to the next position where the specified device/label is used as a contact. Operating procedure 1. Place the cursor to the device/label to be searched. 2. Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Next Contact]. ( + + ) 6 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Moving to next contact ■ 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS The cursor moves to the searched contact. SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 8.1.2 Moving to specified device/label 8-3 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE Moving to next coil ■ Move from the device/label at the cursor position to the next position where the specified device/label is used as a coil. Operating procedure 1. Place the cursor to the device/label to be searched. 2. Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Next Coil]. ( + + ) The cursor moves to the searched coil. ■ Return to previous position Return the cursor to the previous position before the [Next Device]/[Next Contact]/[Next Coil] function execution. The maximum number of times the cursor can be returned is 30. Operating procedure • Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Next Coil]. ( + + ) The cursor returns to the one previous position before the search. ● Selecting a device/label to be moved When two or more devices/labels are used for the instruction at the cursor, the screen to select the device/label to be moved is displayed. Select the device/label from the list. The following is the screen when a device is selected. ● When the cursor does not return to the previous position by the [Back] function When any of the following operations is performed, the cursor does not return to the previous position even when [Find/ Replace] ⇒ [Back] is selected after the jump. • When the step number is changed after the program is modified. • When the device is changed/deleted. ● Operation of the [Next Device]/[Next Contact]/[Next Coil] function on the screen other than ladder and SFC (Zoom) editors When the [Next Device]/[Next Contact]/[Next Coil] function is performed on any of the following screens, the device is not searched in the screen but it is searched in the ladder and SFC (Zoom) editors in the project only. • Reference window • Entry Ladder Monitor screen 8-4 8.1.2 Moving to specified device/label 8.1 Searching for and Replacing Data in Ladder Programs 1 Jumping to specified step number OVERVIEW Jump to the specified step number. Screen display 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Jump]. Operating procedure 1. Enter the jump destination step number. Item 3 Description Enter a program step number for the jump destination. Step No. 2. Click the Click to select from the list of ten step numbers entered previously. button. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 8.1.3 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS The cursor jumps to the specified step number. ● Jump function On the program editor, pressing a numeric key on the keyboard enables to display the Jump screen. SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 8.1.3 Jumping to specified step number 8-5 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8.1.4 Changing the module start I/O numbers Change the module start I/O number used for the arguments of the FROM(P), TO(P), DFRO(P), and DTO(P) instructions when a module I/O number is changed by changing the module mounting status. For FXCPU, the FROM(P), TO(P), DFROM(P), and DTO(P) instructions are the target instructions. Screen display Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Change Module I/O No.]. For FXCPU, "Old Module I/O No. Range (HEX)" is indicated as "Old Module I/O No. Range (0 - 7)", and "New Module Start Address (HEX)" is indicated as "New Module Start Address (0 - 7)". Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen. Item Old Module I/O No. Range (HEX) Description Enter a module start I/O number in the range to be changed. Start Click End Click New Module Start Address (HEX) 2. Click the to select from the list of ten module I/O numbers entered previously. Enter a replaced module I/O number that corresponds to the module I/O number entered for "Start". Click Find Direction to select from the list of ten module I/O numbers entered previously. Enter a last module I/O number in the range to be changed. to select from the list of ten module I/O numbers entered previously. Down from Head Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the program regardless of the current step position. Down from current step Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the current step position. Specify step range Select this to execute a search in the range set by the entered step numbers. button. The cursor moves to the searched old module I/O number. 3. Click the or button change the I/O number. The old module I/O numbers are replaced with the new module I/O numbers, and the search for the old module I/O numbers continues. If the button is clicked, all searched old module I/O numbers are batch replaced with the new module I/O numbers. 4. 8-6 Click the button to end the batch-replace function. 8.1.4 Changing the module start I/O numbers 8.1 Searching for and Replacing Data in Ladder Programs Considerations for replacing module start I/O numbers (QCPU (Q mode)/ LCPU) The following explains the considerations for replacing module start I/O numbers. ● Specification of the module I/O number 2 When specifying a module I/O number, specify the actual module I/O number. SCREEN CONFIGURATION QY10 QY10 QY41P Q68ADV QX10 QX10 QX10 QX10 3 X0000 X0010 X0020 X0030 to to to to X000F X001F X002F X003F 0040 to 004F Y0050 Y0070 Y0080 to to to Y006F Y007F Y008F PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE CPU module Example Power supply module 1 OVERVIEW ■ Start input number of the read data: H40 ● Replacing module start I/O numbers of intelligent function module devices 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Use the device replacing function to replace the module start I/O numbers of intelligent function module devices. ( GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) BMOV U2 G11 D0 K4 Module start I/O number of intelligent function module device SETTING LABELS 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 6 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 8.1.4 Changing the module start I/O numbers 8-7 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8.2 Searching for and Replacing Data in SFC Programs This section explains how to jump to the specified SFC step number or block number using the SFC diagram or SFC block list of the SFC program. For the operations of device search/replace, instruction search/replace, and open/closed contact change functions, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) 8.2.1 Jumping to specified SFC step number/transition number on SFC diagram Q CPU L CPU FX Jump to the SFC step number/transition number in the specified block when the cursor is placed on the SFC diagram. Screen display Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Jump]. Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen. Item 2. Description Data Name Select the block data name (title). Block No. Display the block number corresponds to "Data Name". Step/Transition Set the jump destination of the SFC step number/transition number. Step No. Select this to jump to the specified SFC step number. Transition No. Select this to jump to the specified transition number. Click the button. The cursor jumps to the SFC step number/transition number of the specified block. 8-8 8.2.1 Jumping to specified SFC step number/transition number on SFC diagram 8.2 Searching for and Replacing Data in SFC Programs 1 Searching for jump with step number on SFC diagram Q CPU L CPU FX Search for a jump of jump source with specifying the step number of jump destination when the cursor is placed on an SFC diagram. OVERVIEW 8.2.2 2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION Step number of jump destination 3 Find PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Jump Find 4 PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Screen display Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Find Jump Step]. Step number of jump destination 5 Enter the step number of jump destination Click to select from the 10 step numbers of jump destination entered previously. 6 Enter a step number of jump destination. Item Step number of jump destination 2. Click the Description EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS 1. SETTING LABELS Operating procedure button. The cursor is moved to the jump of jump source. 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS ● Jump Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Find Jump Step] to move the cursor to a jump of jump source when the cursor is placed on a step. SEARCH AND REPLACE 8 8.2.2 Searching for jump with step number on SFC diagram 8-9 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8.2.3 Jumping to specified SFC step number/block number on SFC diagram Q CPU L CPU FX Jump to the SFC step number/block number when the cursor is placed on the SFC diagram. Operating procedure 1. Press the numeric key when the cursor is placed on the SFC diagram. Entry field 2. Set the items on the screen. Item 3. Description Entry field Display the number that is entered on the SFC diagram. Enter an SFC step number or block number of the jump destination. Step No. Select this to jump to the specified SFC step number. Block No. Select this to jump to the specified block number. Click the button. When "Step No." is selected, the cursor moves to the specified SFC step number in the block being edited. When "Block No." is selected, the SFC diagram of the specified block number is displayed. 8 - 10 8.2.3 Jumping to specified SFC step number/block number on SFC diagram 8.2 Searching for and Replacing Data in SFC Programs 1 Replacing SFC step number on SFC diagram Q CPU L CPU FX Replace a jump destination step number or reset destination step number in each block. OVERVIEW 8.2.4 2 Screen display SCREEN CONFIGURATION Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Change SFC Step No.]. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Operating procedure Set the items on the screen. Select the block data name. Block No. Display the block number corresponds to "Data Name". Jump Destination Step Enter old and new SFC step numbers when replacing the jump destination SFC step number. Enter an old SFC step number. Click New Step No. Enter old and new SFC step numbers when replacing the reset destination SFC step number. Reset Destination Step*1 Enter an old SFC step number. Old Step No. Click New Step No. to select from the list of reset destination step numbers used within the block. Enter a new SFC step number. Not supported by FXCPU. Click the 6 button. The cursor moves to the searched SFC step number. 3. Click the or 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS *1 : to select from the list of jump destination step numbers used within the block. Enter a new SFC step number. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Data Name Old Step No. 2. 4 Description SETTING LABELS Item button. When the button is selected, the old step number at the cursor position is replaced with the new step number. When the cursor is not at the old step number, it moves to the next searched step number. When the button is selected, all old step numbers in the specified block are replaced with the new step number. 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE ● Conversion/compilation status after replacing step numbers After replacing step numbers, the program becomes unconverted/uncompiled status. Convert or compile the program. 7 EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 1. 8.2.4 Replacing SFC step number on SFC diagram 8 - 11 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 8.2.5 Searching for blocks on SFC block list Q CPU L CPU FX Search for a block or block title on the SFC block list. Screen display Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Jump]. Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen. Item 2. Description Block No. Select this to jump to the specified block number. When "Data Name" is selected, the block number corresponds to "Data Name" is displayed. Data Name Select this to jump to the specified data name (title). When "Block No." is selected, the data name corresponds to "Block No." is displayed. Click the button. The cursor moves to the specified block. 8 - 12 8.2.5 Searching for blocks on SFC block list 8.2 Searching for and Replacing Data in SFC Programs 1 Searching for devices on SFC block list Q CPU L CPU FX Search for devices on the SFC block list. OVERVIEW 8.2.6 2 Screen display SCREEN CONFIGURATION Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Block Information Find Device]. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 3 Operating procedure Set the items on the screen. 4 Description Enter a device/label to be searched for. Find Device Down from Head Select this to search for devices in the downward direction from the start of the program regardless of the current cursor position. Down Select this to search for devices in the downward direction from the cursor position. Up Select this to search for devices in the upward direction from the cursor position. Displayed Data Only Select this to search for devices only within the data that are being displayed. Include Assigned Data Select this to search for devices including those assigned to labels. Find Range Click the button. 6 The cursor moves to the searched device. EDITING SFC PROGRAMS 7 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE 2. 5 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS Find Direction Click to select from the list of ten devices entered previously. PROGRAM CONFIGURATIONS Item SETTING LABELS 1. 8.2.6 Searching for devices on SFC block list 8 - 13 GX Works2 8 SEARCH AND REPLACE MEMO 8 - 14 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 9 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 This chapter explains basic operation for editing device comments, statements, and notes. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 9.1 Editing Device Comments 9-2 9.2 Editing Statements and Notes 9-2 9.3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes 9.4 Changing the Type (PLC/Peripheral) of Statement/ Note 9 - 21 9.5 Displaying Line Statements on Tree View 9 - 22 9.6 Jumping from Line Statement List 9 - 27 9.7 Merge Process when Reading Programs from Programmable Controller CPU 9 - 28 Editing SFC Comments 9 - 30 9 - 13 SETTING OPTIONS 13 APPENDIX A I INDEX 9.8 MONITORING 12 9-1 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.1 Editing Device Comments Q CPU L CPU FX For the method for editing device comments and the related functions, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) 9.2 Editing Statements and Notes Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to edit statements and notes, and the related functions. 9.2.1 Statements and notes The following explains the overview of statements and notes, and the considerations for editing. Screen display Line statement Statement displayed on tree Note P statement I statement 9-2 9.2.1 Statements and notes 9.2 Editing Statements and Notes 9 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES What is a statement? A statement is a comment that is appended to a ladder block. Appending statements makes the processing flow easy to understand. Statements include line statements, P statements and I statements. A line statement can be displayed on a tree view of the Navigation window. (For details of the line statements displayed on a tree view Section 9.5) ■ 10 : A comment appended to a ladder block as a whole. : A comment appended to a pointer number. : A comment appended to an interrupt pointer number. CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS • Line statement • P statement • I statement What is a note? A note is a comment that is appended to a coil and application instruction. Appending notes makes the details of coils and application instructions easy to understand. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU ■ 11 Number of characters that can be entered The following table shows the number of characters that can be entered for a statement or note. Name Line Statement P Statement 64 characters Note MONITORING 64 characters I Statement ■ 12 Number of characters 32 characters Types of statement and note 13 'PLC' and 'Peripheral' are the types of statement and note. PLC Line statement P statement I statement Applicable model QCPU (Q mode)/ LCPU Note Peripheral Line statement P statement I statement Note Function • Statements and notes can be stored on the programmable controller CPU. • PLC statement is counted as uses the following number of steps. 2+ QCPU (Q mode)/ LCPU/ FXCPU A Number of characters steps (Decimal fraction is rounded up) 2 • Statements and notes cannot be stored on the programmable controller CPU. (Only the position information can be stored.) Statements and notes must be saved on a peripheral equipment. APPENDIX Name SETTING OPTIONS ■ • One statement or note line is counted as one step. • A * symbol is prefixed to the entered text automatically. I 9.2.1 Statements and notes INDEX ● Statement/note types for FXCPU Only the Peripheral statement/note function is available for FXCPU. The settings regarding 'PLC/Peripheral' type described in this section cannot be used. ● Considerations when editing Peripheral statements/notes on FXCPU • The positioning data cannot be stored on FXCPU. • Steps are not counted as FXCPU projects without labels. 9-3 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.2.2 Entering statements Enter line statements, P statements, and I statements. Entering statements ■ Enter a line statement. Item Toolbar Statement Operating procedure 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Statement] ( ). The statement entry mode is established. 2. Move the cursor to the left end of the ladder block where a line statement is entered. 3. Press the key. The Enter Line Statement screen is displayed. 4. Select the note type; "In PLC" or "In Peripheral". PLC statement is not supported by FXCPU. 5. Enter a line statement. 6. Select "Display in Navigation Window" to display a line statement on a tree view of the Navigation window. "[Title]" is prefixed to the line statement. This function is not supported by FXCPU projects without labels. 7. Click the button. The entered line statement is displayed on the editing screen. When "In Peripheral" is selected, '*' is automatically prefixed to the line statement. When displaying a line statement on a tree view of the Navigation window, "[Title]" is prefixed to the line statement. 9-4 9.2.2 Entering statements 9.2 Editing Statements and Notes 9 To disable the line statement entry mode, select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Statement] ( ) again. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 8. The statement entry mode is disabled. ● Characters that cannot be used for line statement ";" cannot be prefixed to a line statement. ● Entering line statements on the Enter Symbol screen. Move the cursor to the left end of the ladder block where a line statement is entered and press the key. The Enter Symbol screen is displayed. Enter a note as shown below. CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 Enter a line statement after entering ';' for PLC ', ';*' for Peripheral. For FXCPU, enter a line statement after entering ';' for Peripheral. When displaying a line statement on the Project view, enter [Title] after ';' or ';*'. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 ● Displaying statements on the editing screen. Display/hide of statements can be switched by selecting [View] ⇒ [Statement]. (Section 2.2.4) 12 MONITORING Entering P statements and I statements ■ Enter a P statement or I statement. Operating procedure Select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Statement] ( ). SETTING OPTIONS 1. 13 The statement entry mode is established. 3. Move the cursor to the pointer number or interrupt pointer number where a P statement or I statement is entered. A APPENDIX 2. Press the key. I The Enter P/I Statement screen is displayed. 4. Select the statement type; "In PLC" or "In Peripheral". 5. INDEX PLC statement is not supported by FXCPU. Enter a P or I statement. 9.2.2 Entering statements 9-5 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES 6. Click the button. The entered P or I statement is displayed on the editing screen. P and I statements are enclosed by brackets [ ]. 7. To disable the P statement/I statement entry mode, select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Statement] ( ) again. The statement entry mode is disabled. ● Entering P or I statements on the Enter Symbol screen Move the cursor to the pointer number or interrupt pointer number where a P or I statement is entered and press the key. The Enter Symbol screen is displayed. Enter a line statement shown below. Following the already entered pointer number or interrupt pointer number, enter ';' for 'PLC' and ';*' for 'Peripheral', and then enter a P or I statement. For FXCPU, enter a P or I statement after entering ';' for Peripheral. ● Displaying statements on the editing screen Display/hide of statements can be switched by selecting [View] ⇒ [Statement]. (Section 2.2.4) 9-6 9.2.2 Entering statements 9.2 Editing Statements and Notes 9 Modifying and deleting statements EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.2.3 Modify and delete statements. Modifying statements ■ 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Modify a statement. Operating procedure 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Statement] ( ). The statement entry mode is established. 11 Move the cursor to the statement to be modified. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 2. 12 3. Press the key. Change the type and/or modify the statement. 5. Click the 13 SETTING OPTIONS 4. MONITORING For line statements, the Enter Line Statement screen is displayed. For P and I statements, the Enter P/I Statement screen is displayed. button. The modified statement is displayed on the editing screen. A To disable the statement entry mode, select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Statement] ( ) again. APPENDIX The statement entry mode is disabled. I INDEX 6. 9.2.3 Modifying and deleting statements 9-7 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES ● Modifying statements on the Enter Symbol screen Move the cursor to the statement to be modified and press the key. The Enter Symbol screen is displayed. Modify the statement as shown below. Do not delete ';', pointer number or interrupt pointer number when modifying a statement. When changing 'PLC' to 'Peripheral', enter '*' after ';'. When changing 'Peripheral' to 'PLC', delete '*' postfixed to ';'. Line statement P statement I statement ● Displaying statements on the editing screen Display/hide of statements can be switched by selecting [View] ⇒ [Statement]. (Section 2.2.4) Deleting statements ■ Delete a line statement, P statement or I statement. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the statement to be deleted. 2. Press the key. The statement is deleted. ● Displaying statements on the editing screen Display/hide of statements can be switched by selecting [View] ⇒ [Statement]. (Section 2.2.4) 9-8 9.2.3 Modifying and deleting statements 9.2 Editing Statements and Notes 9 Entering notes EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.2.4 Enter a note in the program. Item Toolbar Note 10 1. CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Operating procedure Select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Note] ( ). The note entry mode is established. Move the cursor to the coil or application instruction to which a note is appended. 3. Press the key. 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 2. 12 4. MONITORING The Enter Note screen is displayed. Select the note type; "In PLC" or "In Peripheral". PLC note is not supported by FXCPU. Enter a note. 6. Click the SETTING OPTIONS 5. 13 button. The entered note is displayed on the editing screen. When "In Peripheral" is selected, '*' is automatically prefixed to the note. APPENDIX A I To disable the note entry mode, select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Note] ( ) again. The note entry mode is disabled. INDEX 7. 9.2.4 Entering notes 9-9 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES ● Notes can be entered on the Enter Symbol screen Move the cursor to the coil or application instruction to which a note is appended and press the key. The Enter Symbol screen is displayed. Enter a note as shown below. Following the already entered device/instruction, enter ';' for, 'PLC' and ';*' for 'Peripheral' first, and then enter a note. ● Displaying notes on the editing screen Display/hide of notes can be switched by selecting [View] ⇒ [Note]. (Section 2.2.4) 9 - 10 9.2.4 Entering notes 9.2 Editing Statements and Notes 9 Modifying and deleting notes EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.2.5 Modify and delete notes. Modifying notes ■ 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Modify a note. Operating procedure 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Note] ( ). The note entry mode is established. 11 Move the cursor to the note to be modified. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 2. 12 Press the key. MONITORING 3. The Enter Note screen is displayed. Change the type and/or modify the note. 5. Click the 13 SETTING OPTIONS 4. button. The modified note is displayed on the editing screen. To disable the note entry mode, select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Note] ( ) again. A APPENDIX The note entry mode is disabled. I INDEX 6. 9.2.5 Modifying and deleting notes 9 - 11 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES Deleting notes ■ Delete a note. Operating procedure 1. Move the cursor to the note to be deleted. 2. Press the key. The note is deleted. ● Notes can be modified or deleted on the Enter Symbol screen Move the cursor to the coil or application instruction whose note is deleted or modified and press the key. The Enter Symbol screen is displayed. Modify or delete the note as shown below. Do not delete '; (*)' when modifying a note. Delete '; (*)' as well when deleting a note. When changing 'PLC' to 'Peripheral', enter '*' after ';'. When changing 'Peripheral' to 'PLC', delete '*' postfixed to ';'. ● Displaying notes on the editing screen Display/hide of notes can be switched by selecting [View] ⇒ [Note]. (Section 2.2.4) 9 - 12 9.2.5 Modifying and deleting notes 9.3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to batch edit statements and notes. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Batch Editing Statements and Notes Batch editing of statements and notes cannot be performed when function blocks or inline structured text are used in a program. Screen display 11 ). WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Statement/Note Batch Edit] ( CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 Restrictions Batch Edit screen for notes 12 MONITORING Batch Edit screen for I statements Batch Edit screen for P statements 13 Batch Edit screen for line statements SETTING OPTIONS 9.3 APPENDIX A INDEX I 9 - 13 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES Display contents Item Tab Step Pointer Description Line Statement Display the batch-edit screen for line statements. P Statement Display the batch-edit screen for P statements. I Statement Display the batch-edit screen for I statements. Note Display the batch-edit screen for notes. Line Statement Display the start step numbers of all ladder blocks in the program. Note Display the step numbers of all coils and application instructions in the program. P Statement Display all pointer numbers in the program. I Statement Display all interrupt pointer numbers in the program. Screen button ● Changes the type between 'PLC' and 'Peripheral'. ● Inserts a row above the selected line statement. ● Inserts a row below the selected line statement. ● Deletes a line statement. ● / "Edit": Moves statement/note under a row where the cursor is placed to one row or ladder block above. "Find": Executes search in the upward direction from the selected statement or note. ● / "Edit": Moves statement/note above a row where the cursor is placed to one row or ladder block below. "Find": Executes a search in the downward direction from the selected statement or note. ● Moves the cursor to the selected statement or note on the editing screen. ● Considerations when editing statements/notes in FXCPU. The PLC statement/note function is not available for FXCPU. Thus the settings regarding 'PLC/Peripheral' type described in this section cannot be used. For details of the 'PLC/Peripheral' type, refer to Section 9.2.1. 9 - 14 9.3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes 9 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Modifying statements and notes Modify a statement or note. Operating procedure 1. Select a statement or note to be modified. 10 Select CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS ■ 2. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 Modify the statement or note. 12 MONITORING Changing the type of statements and notes Change the 'PLC' or 'Peripheral' type of a statement or note. Operating procedure 1. Select a range in which the type is changed. 2. Select the statement/note type; "In PLC" or "In Peripheral". 3. Click the 13 Select button. SETTING OPTIONS ■ A APPENDIX The type is changed. A * symbol is appended to a statement or note set as 'Peripheral'. Change from 'PLC' to 'Peripheral' INDEX I 9 - 15 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES Displaying Line Statements on Tree View ■ Display a line statement on a tree view of the Navigation window. This function is not supported by FXCPU projects without labels. Operating procedure 1. Select a line statement to be displayed on a tree view. 2. Select "Display in Navigation Window". Select "[Title]" is prefixed to the line statement. Inserting rows within line statements ■ Insert a row within line statements. Operating procedure 1. Select a statement for which a row is to be inserted. 2. Select the statement type; "In PLC" or "In Peripheral". 3. Click the or Select button. : Inserts a blank row above the cursor position. : Inserts a blank row below the cursor position. 4. 9 - 16 Select the inserted row and enter a statement. 9.3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes 9 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Deleting rows of line statements Delete a row of line statements. Operating procedure 1. Select the line statement to be deleted. 10 Select CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS ■ Click the button. 12 MONITORING The selected line statement is deleted. Moving statements or notes ■ Move a statement or note. 13 Operating procedure 1. Select a statement or note to be moved. 2. To move a line statement, select the type; "Line" or "Ladder". Select A : Moves the selected line statement in unit of row. "Ladder" : Moves the selected line statement in unit of ladder block. Click the button. APPENDIX "Line" or : Moves statement/note under a row where the cursor is placed to one row or ladder block I above. : Moves statement/note above a row where the cursor is placed to one row or ladder block below. INDEX 3. SETTING OPTIONS 2. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 9 - 17 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES Editing examples Move Step 60 upward in unit of row Select Select The line statement one above the selected statement is deleted, and under the selected statement moves upward. 9 - 18 9.3 Batch Editing Statements and Notes 9 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Move Step 60 upward in unit of ladder block 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Select WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 Select MONITORING 12 SETTING OPTIONS 13 APPENDIX A I INDEX The unit of line statements of ladder block above the selected statement is deleted, and the selected statement below the cursor position moves one ladder block upward. 9 - 19 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES Searching for statements and notes ■ Search for a statement or note. Operating procedure 1. Enter a statement or note to be searched for in the "Find" field. 2. Click the button. or : Starts searching in the upward direction from the selected position. Enter : Starts searching in the downward direction from the selected position. 3. The cursor moves to the searched statement or note. Searched statement Jumping to specified statement and note ■ Jump to a specified statement or note. Operating procedure 1. Select a statement or note for the jump target. Select 2. Click the button. The cursor jumps to the selected statement or note on the editing screen. 9 - 20 9.4 Changing the Type (PLC/Peripheral) of Statement/Note 9 Changing the Type (PLC/Peripheral) of Statement/Note Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to change the statement/note type of the converted program to PLC or Peripheral. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.4 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Screen display Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Switch Statement/Note Type]. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 12 Select this to select the target whose type is to be changed. Multiple objects can be selected. 13 Item Object Type Find Direction 2. Click the Change in PLC Select this to change 'Peripheral' to 'PLC'. Change in Peripheral Select this to change 'PLC' to 'Peripheral'. Down from Head Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the program regardless of the current cursor position. Down from Cursor Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor position. Specified Range Select this to execute a search in the range set by the entered step numbers. or APPENDIX Click the button to change the type. The type is changed, and the search for the next statements or notes continues. If the notes. A button. The cursor moves to the searched statement or note. 3. SETTING OPTIONS Description Set the items on the screen. button is clicked, the types are batch replaced for all searched statements or ● Switch statement/note type function The statement/note type at the cursor position can also be changed by pressing the + keys. When the type of statement/note is changed, the program becomes in an unconverted/uncompiled status. Compile the program. ● When statements/notes are not entered at the right position When statements/notes are not entered at the right position even after the merge process is performed, correct their positions using the statement/note batch editing function. (Section 9.3) 9 - 21 I INDEX 1. MONITORING Operating procedure GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.5 Displaying Line Statements on Tree View Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains a line statement displayed on a tree view of the Navigation window. This function is not supported by FXCPU projects without labels. 9.5.1 Line statements on tree view The line statements can be displayed on a tree view of the Navigation window. Displaying the line statements on a tree view provides the easy-to-understand general program flow. Since the program where the line statement is set can be displayed with the line statements on a tree view, the quick search of ladder blocks is also possible. ● Program range which can be displayed with line statements on tree view Double-click a line statement on a tree view to jump to a ladder block where corresponding line statement is set. The programs before the next line statement on a tree view are displayed by the jump function. If there are no next line statements on a tree view, the programs before the END instruction are displayed. Double-click "Program" under Project view ⇒ "POU" ⇒ "Program" ⇒ "(program)" ⇒ "(block)" ⇒ "Program" of the Navigation window to display a whole program. ● Copying/pasting line statements on tree view When copying or pasting the line statements on a tree view, the ladder blocks from a line statement on a tree view on a ladder to the programs before the next line statement on a tree view are copied or pasted. 9 - 22 9.5.1 Line statements on tree view 9.5 Displaying Line Statements on Tree View 9 Displaying line statements on tree view EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.5.2 Display a line statement on a tree view of the Navigation window. Operating procedure 1. 10 Select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Statement] ( ). 2. CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS The statement entry mode is established. Move the cursor to a line statement to be displayed on a tree view. Press the key. The Enter Line Statement screen is displayed. Select "Display in Navigation Window", or enter "[Title]" in front of the line statement. 5. Click the 6. Select [Compile] ⇒ [Build]. MONITORING 4. 12 button. SETTING OPTIONS 13 The line statement is displayed on a tree view. When multiple line statements on a tree view exist in single ladder block, only the uppermost line statement is displayed on a tree view. ● Displaying line statements of POUs on tree view Only the line statements of programs can be displayed on a tree view. Even if entering "[Title]" in front of the line statement of function block, the line statements cannot be displayed on a tree view. ● Maximum number of line statements on tree view The maximum number of line statements on a tree view in single program is 100. The maximum number of line statements on a tree view in single project is 800. When multiple line statements on a tree view exist in single ladder block, only the uppermost line statement is displayed and the others are not, however, all line statements are counted as the number of line statements on a tree view. ● Displaying spaces of line statements on tree view • The spaces that exist before and after the line statement on the ladder are not displayed on the tree view. • The spaces that exist before and after the line statement are deleted by changing the data name of line statement on the tree view. 9.5.2 Displaying line statements on tree view 9 - 23 APPENDIX A I INDEX 3. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.5.3 Disabling setting of line statements on tree view Change the setting of line statements on a tree view to hide. Operating procedure 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [Statement] ( ). The statement entry mode is established. 2. Move the cursor to a line statement on a tree view. 3. Press the key. The Enter Line Statement screen is displayed. 4. Clear "Display in Navigation Window", or delete "[Title]" in front of the line statement. 5. Click the 6. Select [Compile] ⇒ [Build]. button. The line statement is deleted from the tree. If there are no line statements on a tree view in a program, the END instructions are also deleted from a tree. ● Considerations for deleting line statements on tree view When deleting the line statements on the Navigation window, the ladder blocks from a line statement on a tree view on a ladder to the programs before the next line statement on a tree view are also deleted. (Section 9.5.5) 9 - 24 9.5.3 Disabling setting of line statements on tree view 9.5 Displaying Line Statements on Tree View Move the ladder blocks on a tree view of the Navigation window from a line statement on a tree view to the programs before the next line statement on a tree view. Operating procedure EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Moving ladder blocks on tree view 10 1. Select a line statement on a tree view on the Navigation window. 2. Drag and drop the line statement to the desired position on the program. The ladder blocks from the selected line statement on a tree view to before the next line statement on a tree view are moved. CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 9.5.4 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 12 MONITORING Select SETTING OPTIONS 13 A APPENDIX Drag and drop ● Copying to other programs When copying the ladder blocks within the range from a line statement on a tree view to the programs before the next line statement on a tree view to other programs, drag and drop the line statement on a tree view of other programs. The copied ladder blocks are pasted in front of the END instruction. 9.5.4 Moving ladder blocks on tree view 9 - 25 INDEX I GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.5.5 Deleting ladder blocks on tree view Delete the ladder blocks on a tree view of the Navigation window from a line statement on a tree view to the programs before the next tree-displayed line statement. Operating procedure 1. Select a line statement on a tree view on the Navigation window. 2. Select [Project] ⇒ [Object] ⇒ [Delete]. The ladder blocks from the selected line statement on a tree view to the programs before the next line statement on a tree view are deleted. Select Delete 9 - 26 9.5.5 Deleting ladder blocks on tree view 9.6 Jumping from Line Statement List 9 Jumping from Line Statement List Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains the function that displays line statements used in the ladder program and searches for a specified line statement. The corresponding line statement in the program is displayed by jumping from the list. 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Screen display Select [Find/Replace] ⇒ [Line Statement List] ( EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.6 ). WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 Line statement list 12 Operating procedure Item Description Enter a character string of the line statement to be searched for. Find Click Line statement list 2. MONITORING Set the item on the screen. to select from the list of character strings searched previously. Display a list of line statements used in the program. Step Display step numbers to which the line statements are set. Line Statement Display line statements used in the program. 13 Double-click the selected row in the line statement list. The position jumps from the line statement list to the corresponding line statement on the program editor. SETTING OPTIONS 1. A ● / Searches for line statements that contain the character string entered in the "Find" field toward up/ down direction from the cursor. ● APPENDIX Screen button I INDEX Updates the line statement list. 9 - 27 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.7 Merge Process when Reading Programs from Programmable Controller CPU This section explains the merge process when reading sequence programs contain Peripheral statements/notes created in the project without labels from the programmable controller CPU. For FXCPU, the merge process is executed automatically when reading data from a programmable controller CPU. Thus the setting is not necessary. 9.7.1 Merge process Q CPU L CPU FX The character data of Peripheral statements/notes are not written to the programmable controller CPU when sequence programs are written to the programmable controller CPU. By executing the merge process when reading sequence programs from the programmable controller CPU, the character data of Peripheral statements/notes saved on the personal computer are merged with the sequence programs stored on the programmable controller CPU and displayed on the ladder program. Sequence program data saved on the personal computer Sequence program data written to the programmable controller CPU Write to PLC <QCPU(Q mode)/LCPU> Character data of Peripheral statements and Peripheral notes are not written to the programmable controller CPU. Character data are read. <FXCPU> Read from PLC Merge process is performed when data are read from the programmable controller CPU. The following table shows the different process status with the execution of the merge process when reading programs from the programmable controller CPU. For FXCPU, the merge process is executed automatically, and character data of the step position where data can be displayed, are read. Setting 9 - 28 CPU type Type Not executing the merge QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU process Peripheral statement Executing the merge process Peripheral statement QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU 9.7.1 Merge process Peripheral note Peripheral note Process status Character data are not merged. Character data are merged. 9.7 Merge Process when Reading Programs from Programmable Controller CPU Q CPU L CPU FX Perform the merge process when reading sequence programs from the programmable controller CPU. 10 Operating procedure 1. Open the sequence program (project) saved on the personal computer. Open the sequence program (project) which is the same data as the sequence program (project) to be read from the programmable controller CPU. For the method for opening a project, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Select [Online] ⇒ [Read from PLC] ( 11 ). WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 2. The Online Data Operation screen is displayed. For details of the Read from PLC function, refer to the following section. (Section 11.1) Select "Merge Peripheral Statement/Note" under "Option" on the Program Detail Setting screen, and execute the Read from PLC function. 12 MONITORING 3. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Performing merge process CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 9.7.2 SETTING OPTIONS 13 4. Confirm if the statements and/or notes of the read sequence program are entered at the correct positions. APPENDIX A I INDEX ● When a statement or note is not entered at the correct position Correct the statement and note positions by the statement/note batch editing function if the statement or note is not entered at the correct position after performing the merge process. (Section 9.3) 9.7.2 Performing merge process 9 - 29 GX Works2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/STATEMENTS/NOTES 9.8 Editing SFC Comments Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to create and edit SFC comments. SFC comment is a generic term for 'SFC step comments' that are appended to SFC steps, and 'transition comments' that are appended to transitions in the created SFC diagrams. The following shows the example of entering 'Step comment' at 'Block: 0, SFC step: 1'. 'Transition comment' is not supported by FXCPU. Operating procedure 1. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [SFC Step/Transition Comment]. The editing screen changes to the SFC comment editing mode. 2. Move the cursor to the position where the SFC comment is entered. 3. Press the key. The Input Device Comment screen is displayed. 4. Enter the SFC comment. The line wrapping of the SFC comment display can be checked when the comment is entered. 5. Click the button. The entered SFC step comment is displayed as shown on the right. ● Disabling the SFC comment editing mode To disable the SFC comment editing mode, select [Edit] ⇒ [Documentation] ⇒ [SFC Step/Transition Comment] again and clear the check box. ● Creating SFC comments SFC comments can be created on the Enter SFC Symbol screen when entering SFC elements, or by using the device comment editor. When creating SFC comments on the device comment editor, specify the device name as shown below. m : Block number n: SFC step/transition number SFC comment QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU FXCPU SFC step comment BLm\Sn Sn Transition comment BLm\TRn - ● Saving SFC comments The created SFC comments are saved in the device comment data. To recover SFC comments when reading SFC programs from the programmable controller CPU, write/read device comments to/from the programmable controller CPU. 9 - 30 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU This chapter explains how to convert/compile created programs. Programs are converted/compiled to sequence programs that can be executed on the programmable controller CPU. 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 For Projects without Labels 10 - 2 10.2 For Projects with Labels 10 - 5 10.3 Compilation 10 - 11 10.4 Checking for Errors and Warnings 10 - 19 13 SETTING OPTIONS 10.1 MONITORING 12 APPENDIX A INDEX I 10 - 1 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS 10.1 For Projects without Labels This section explains how to convert a ladder block created in the project without labels. The ladder conversion confirms edited content of the ladder block. 10.1.1 Converting created programs Q CPU L CPU FX Convert a created program. Operating procedure • Select [Compile] ⇒ [Build] ( ). The unconverted ladder block is converted. For SFC program, all the unconverted blocks are converted. For details of converting only one block under editing, refer to Section 10.1.4. Unconverted ladder block is displayed in gray. 10.1.2 Converting all programs Q CPU L CPU Batch-convert all unconverted programs in the project. Operating procedure • Select [Compile] ⇒ [Build All] ( ). All unconverted programs are converted. 10 - 2 10.1.1 Converting created programs FX 10.1 For Projects without Labels 9 Executing online program change simultaneously with ladder conversion Q CPU L CPU FX Converting only one block Q CPU L CPU FX When editing the SFC program, convert only one block. Operating procedure Select [Compile] ⇒ [Convert Block]. 12 MONITORING Only one block is converted. SETTING OPTIONS 13 APPENDIX A I INDEX • 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 10.1.4 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS For the operation for executing the Online program change simultaneously with the ladder conversion, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 10.1.3 10.1.3 Executing online program change simultaneously with ladder conversion 10 - 3 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS 10.1.5 Checking programs Q CPU L CPU FX Check errors, such as duplicated coils and device range, in the created programs. The check result is displayed on the Output window. Screen display Select [Tool] ⇒ [Check Program]. Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen. Item Description Check Select the item(s) for checking the program. Instruction Check Check if the instruction can be used for the CPU type of the project being edited. Ladder Check Check if the ladder program is created properly. Consistency (pair) Check Check the program consistency for such case as no pointer at the jump destination or no RET instruction in the subroutine program. Duplicated Coil Check Check the duplicated coils. Device Check Check if the device being used is within the range set in the parameter. Check Target Target the Whole *1 : 2. Program*1 Select this to check all programs in the project. Target the Current Program Select this to check only the program being displayed. SFC Check Data - Target All Blocks Select this to check the SFC block list that includes the SFC blocks being displayed. Current Block Select this to check only SFC blocks being displayed. Not supported by FXCPU. Click the button. The program is checked and the result is displayed on the Output window. By double-clicking the result, the corresponding error location in the program is displayed. For checking errors, refer to Section 10.4. 10 - 4 10.1.5 Checking programs 10.2 For Projects with Labels 9 For Projects with Labels Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to convert/compile the uncompiled programs created in the project with labels. Converting/compiling created programs Convert/compile a created program. Since this process compiles only uncompiled programs, the compiling time can be reduced. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 Compilation target Program 1 Converts/compiles uncompiled programs only. Build Program 2 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 10.2.1 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 10.2 Sequence program 1 Sequence program 2 12 Sequence program 3 MONITORING Program 3 Operating procedure Select [Compile] ⇒ [Build] ( A ). APPENDIX The Confirm Build Method screen is displayed. I INDEX 1. 13 SETTING OPTIONS ● Conversion and compilation The following explains the difference between conversion and compilation. Conversion: Confirms edited content of ladder/SFC programs. Compilation: Assigns devices to labels and creates a code to execute the program on a programmable controller CPU. 10.2.1 Converting/compiling created programs 10 - 5 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS 2. Select "Execute compile after conversion", and click the button. Programs are compiled simultaneously with the conversion, and the result is displayed on the Output window. By double-clicking the result (errors/warnings only), the corresponding error location in the program is displayed. For checking errors/warning, refer to Section 10.4. For SFC program, all the unconverted blocks are converted/compiled. Output window ● Build function Only the program being edited is converted when "Convert the selected program" is selected on the Confirm Build Method screen. The conversion operation is the same as the one for the project without labels. (Section 10.1.1) When two or more changes are required in a program, and if "Execute compile after conversion" is selected every time program is changed, processing time is required for each compilation. To reduce compilation processing time, select "Convert the selected program" first, and select "Execute compile after conversion" after all changes are made in a program. ● Compiling programs when adding/changing labels For considerations for compiling programs when adding/changing labels, refer to Section 10.3.3. 10 - 6 10.2.1 Converting/compiling created programs 10.2 For Projects with Labels 9 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Compiling all programs Batch-convert/-compile all programs in the project. Operating procedure 1. 10 Select [Compile] ⇒ [Rebuild All] ( ). The following message is displayed. Clear the check box if the duplicated coil check, ladder program check, and consistency (pairing) check are not performed after the compilation. CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 10.2.2 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 12 Click the button after reading and understanding the considerations described on the message. MONITORING 2. All programs are converted/compiled and the result is displayed on the Output window. By double-clicking the result (errors/warnings only), the corresponding error location in the program is displayed. For checking errors/warning, refer to Section 10.4. SETTING OPTIONS 13 APPENDIX A Output window I INDEX ● Assigning devices to labels when compiling all programs For assigning devices to labels when compiling all programs, refer to Section 10.3. 10.2.2 Compiling all programs 10 - 7 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS 10.2.3 Executing online program change simultaneously with conversion/compilation For the operation for executing the Online program change simultaneously with the conversion/ compilation, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) 10.2.4 Changing operating conditions of compilation Change the operating conditions of compilation. ■ Changing the number of errors and warnings that stops compilation The number of errors and warnings that stops compilation can be changed. If the number of errors and warnings that occurred during compilation reaches the specified value, the compilation is aborted. Screen display Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Compile" ⇒ "Output Result". Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. Item 10 - 8 Description Error Set the number of errors that stops compilation (1 to 9999). Warning Set the number of warnings that stops compilation (1 to 9999). 10.2.3 Executing online program change simultaneously with conversion/compilation 10.2 For Projects with Labels 9 Hiding warning messages EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES ■ Messages displayed on the Output window when compiling programs can be hidden. The registered warnings are not displayed on the Output window. Screen display 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Compile" ⇒ "Output Result". Operating procedure • To register the warnings, enter the warning code and click the button. The registered warnings are not displayed on the Output window. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 12 button. 13 SETTING OPTIONS To cancel the registration, select the warning code and click the The unregistered warnings are displayed on the Output window. MONITORING Enter Select A APPENDIX ● Warning codes Warning codes and their content can be checked on the Output window when compiling programs. (Section 10.4) ● Maximum number of warnings to be invalidated A maximum number of warnings to be invalidated is 100. INDEX I 10.2.4 Changing operating conditions of compilation 10 - 9 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS Using VAR_OUTPUT for an argument of function block ■ Use VAR_OUTPUT for an argument of function block in an ST program. Operating procedure 1. Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ [Compile] ⇒ "ST" ⇒ "Compile Condition 1". 2. Select "Allow VAR_OUTPUT at FB call (ST)". If this check box is cleared, an error occurs when compiling programs. 10 - 10 10.2.4 Changing operating conditions of compilation 10.3 Compilation FX By compilation operation, the labels are assigned to devices, and programs created in project with labels are converted to executable programs on a programmable controller CPU. ● Checking the compilation status Items are displayed in red if the data are in uncompiled status. 12 Compilation target data when compiling all programs When compiling all programs, compilation target data are determined according to the registration/ usage status of data type. The following table shows the compilation target data. : Compiled, ×: Not compiled Compilation target data type Global label data Registration/usage status of compilation target data type Compilation target when compiling all programs - Registered to any of the following programs. • Scan program • Wait program APPENDIX • Fixed interval program • No execution type Structure Declared in the label setting editor. Not declared in the label setting editor. × Declared in the label setting editor. Not declared in the label setting editor. × I INDEX Function block 13 A • Initial program Program (program file) MONITORING 10.3.1 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU The compilation status can be checked on the Project view. Items are displayed in red as shown below if the data are in uncompiled status. Uncompiled data can be displayed on the Project view by right-clicking on global label/POU/program file, and selecting [Open Uncompiled Data] from the shortcut menu. Uncompiled data status is displayed on the Project view. 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Q CPU L CPU EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Compilation SETTING OPTIONS 10.3 10.3.1 Compilation target data when compiling all programs 10 - 11 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS 10.3.2 Assigning devices Assign the devices to the labels set with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function during compilation. For details of device assignment when inline structured text or ST is used, and considerations, refer to the following. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) ■ Assigning devices defined on the label setting editor to the labels The following explains the device assignment to the labels defined on the label setting editor. For global labels, only labels whose "Device" is blank on the label setting editor can be assigned. When both global labels and local labels are assigned, global labels are assigned to devices first, and then local labels are assigned to devices. ● Assigning only one type of device automatically Assign the devices in top down order on the label setting editor. Devices are assigned in descending order on the screen (assigned from higher number of a device number) of device range set with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function. For pointer (P), devices are assigned in ascending order (assigned from lower number of a device number). Example: <Device automatic-assign setting> Set the following device range. • D device: 8000 to 8191 <Label setting> <Devices to be assigned to labels> Definition order 10 - 12 Label name Data type Example of devices to be assigned 1 Label_A Word (signed) D8191 2 Label_B Word (signed) D8190 3 Label_C Double-precision real D8186 4 Label_D Double-precision real D8182 10.3.2 Assigning devices Descending order 10.3 Compilation Assign the devices in top down order on the label setting editor. Devices are assigned in descending order (assigned from higher number of a device number) of device range set with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function. When the number of devices is less than the number of devices required for one label, devices are assigned in descending order of the next device's device range. When the following label requires the devices which are within the above device range, the previous devices which are not assigned are assigned. • D device: 8000 to 8002 • ZR device: 0 to 1023 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU <Label setting> <Devices to be assigned to labels> Data type 12 Example of devices to be assigned 1 Label_A Word (signed) D8002 2 Label_B Word (signed) D8001 3 Label_C Double-precision real ZR1020*1 4 Label_D Double-precision real ZR1016 Descending order Since double-precision real requires four devices, one device of D8000 is not enough. Therefore, the next device ZR is assigned. 13 SETTING OPTIONS *1 : Label name MONITORING Definition order Example 2: <Device automatic-assign setting> Set the following device range. • D device: 8000 to 8002 • ZR device: 0 to 1023 A APPENDIX <Label setting> <Devices to be assigned to labels> *1 : *2 : *3 : Label name Data type I Example of devices to be assigned 1 Label_A Word (signed) D8002 2 Label_B Double-precision real ZR1020*1 3 Label_C Word (signed) D8001*2 4 Label_D Double-precision real ZR1016*3 Descending order INDEX Definition order 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Example 1: <Device automatic-assign setting> Set the following device range. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 ● Assigning multiple types of device automatically (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) Double-precision real requires four devices, two device of D8000 to D8001 are not enough. Therefore, the next device ZR is assigned. Since word (signed) requires one device, D8001 can be assigned. Therefore, return to the previous device (D device), and the device is assigned to the label. Since double-precision real requires four devices, one device of D8000 is not enough. Therefore, the next device ZR is assigned. 10.3.2 Assigning devices 10 - 13 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS ■ Assigning to temporary variable (automatically assigned device to other than label) For details of device assignment to temporary variable, and considerations when inline structured text or ST is used, refer to the following. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) ■ Checking usage of automatically assigned devices The usage of devices within the range set on the Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting screen can be checked when compiling programs. After programs are compiled, the usage of device points and device assignment range are displayed on the Output window. ● Displaying usage of device assignment range Assigned devices from the minimum number to the maximum number are displayed for the usage of device assignment range. When [Build] is executed repeatedly after changing/deleting labels, the devices which are not used are included in the usage points. Execute [Rebuild All] to display the correct usage of the device assignment range. 10 - 14 10.3.2 Assigning devices 10.3 Compilation ● The "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function Devices in the range set with on the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function (automatically assigned devices) cannot be used in the program. If automatically assigned devices are used in a program, a compilation error occurs. (For the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function Section 5.8) ● When array labels are used When devices/labels are used for indexes in array labels, the compilation result is created with the devices shown below. Note that the device values may be overwritten when the following devices are used in user programs. • Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU: Z0, Z1 • Universal model QCPU, LCPU: Z16 to 19 • FXCPU: Z0, V0 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Since the devices assigned once cannot be used, if a program or label is changed and executed "Build" repeatedly, the number of used devices is increased and the number of assignable devices is decreased. Execute "Rebuild All". When D, W, R, ZR are selected as automatically assigned device concurrently, devices are assigned from D, W. If the number of D, W is not enough, devices are assigned from R, ZR. Note that since the operation processing times of D, W, and R differ from that of ZR, the control timing may change depending on the program content. For details of operation processing time, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instructions) 12 MONITORING ● When the multiple types of devices are assigned automatically (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Considerations of compilation The label checking method differs according to the programming language. • For Ladder Diagram and Sequential Function Chart (Zoom), check if the devices are applicable to the instruction. • For Structured Text, check if the data type is applicable to the instruction. ● Canceling the compilation The compilation is canceled in a program file unit. Therefore, even when the button is clicked during the compilation, the compilation will not be canceled until the compilation of one program file is completed. Note that a large-scale program file with multiple function blocks requires a longer time to cancel the compilation. SETTING OPTIONS 13 ● Checking labels used for arguments of instruction A APPENDIX 10.3.3 INDEX I 10.3.3 Considerations of compilation 10 - 15 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS ● Assigning devices to labels when compiling all programs All programs need to be compiled when the following operations are performed. • Changing the following PLC parameters*1 • "Common Pointer No." and "Timer Limit Setting" on the <<PLC System>> tab • "File Register" and "File for Local Device" on the <<PLC File>> tab • Settings on the <<Device>> tab • Changing the following option settings • "Default Length of String Data Type" in "Label Setting Editor" • Settings in "Compile" • Changing automatically assigned devices • Changing PLC type • Changing project type • Reading data from programmable controller CPU (except for when reading symbolic information and parameters at the same time) • Reading data written to the programmable controller CPU by GX Developer • Using Open Other Project function When all programs are compiled, devices are reassigned to labels in all POUs. If all the compiled programs are written to the programmable controller CPU and run as they are, the programs may be processed with the device values set before the program change. After compiling all programs, clear the device values set before the program change by the following procedure. Note that, by setting the following option, device values in the range set in the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function can be automatically cleared to 0 after writing programs to the programmable controller CPU. • [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "PLC Read/Write" ⇒ "When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation, clear the device ranges set in the Device/Label Auto-Assign setting to 0" *1 : For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU only • QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU Operation 1. Switch the programmable controller CPU to STOP. 2. Select [Online] ⇒ [Write to PLC], and write programs to the programmable controller CPU. 3. Switch the programmable controller CPU to RESET. It can also be reset by selecting [Compile] ⇒ [Remote Operation]. 4. Select [Online] ⇒ [PLC Memory Operation] ⇒ [Clear PLC Memory] to clear the memories. If VAR_RETAIN is set with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function, clear all device memories including latches. If file registers are set with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function, clear all file registers. • FXCPU Operation 1. Switch the programmable controller CPU to STOP. 2. Select [Online] ⇒ [Write to PLC], and write programs to the programmable controller CPU. 3. Select [Online] ⇒ [PLC Memory Operation] ⇒ [Clear PLC Memory] to clear the device memories. 10 - 16 10.3.3 Considerations of compilation 10.3 Compilation Operation 1. Add/change labels only. (Do not edit the programs.) 2. Select [Compile] ⇒ [Build], and compile the programs. 3. Register added/changed labels to the Watch window and clear the current values to 0. 4. Edit the programs and select [Compile] ⇒ [Online Program Change]. ● Modification of global labels and function blocks If global labels and/or function blocks are modified, multiple programs become the compilation targets. Write all program of the compilation targets to the programmable controller CPU to apply the modifications. 10 11 12 MONITORING Example: Compiling programs after modifying Function block 1 in the following program configuration. Function block 1 is compiled and the program MAIN and SUB1 are modified. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES When programs are compiled after adding/changing labels, devices are reassigned to labels in uncompiled POUs only. Since previous device values may remain among the devices reassigned to labels, clear the previous device values by the following procedure when adding/changing labels. CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS ● Compiling programs when adding/changing labels 9 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU The remote RUN function when writing data to programmable controller CPU after all the compiled programs can be disabled by setting the following option. Select "Turn PLC to STOP at time of PLC write after executing Rebuild All and do not execute remote RUN" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "PLC Read/Write". Program configuration of the Simple project 13 SETTING OPTIONS Compilation target POU A Program SUB1 Function block 1 Sequence program MAIN APPENDIX MAIN Function block 1 Sequence program SUB1 I FB_Pool Function block 2 INDEX Function block 1 Function block 1 is used in the program MAIN and SUB1. 10.3.3 Considerations of compilation 10 - 17 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS ● Input arguments of function block Data cannot be written to input arguments (VAR_INPUT) of function block. If data are written to input arguments, a compilation error occurs. ● Step numbers of label program Each step number of the label program is enclosed in parenthesis. Step numbers may increase/decrease when the program is compiled. Step numbers actually written to a programmable controller CPU are step numbers displayed on the device display. When writing the program to a programmable controller CPU, check the step numbers by displaying devices after the compilation. <Label display> Step numbers of label program <Device display> Step numbers of sequence program 10 - 18 10.3.3 Considerations of compilation 10.4 Checking for Errors and Warnings 9 Checking for Errors and Warnings Q CPU L CPU FX When the program check or the compilation is executed, the target programs and label settings are checked and the results are displayed on the Output window. The following explains the checking method for errors displayed on the Output window. Function type 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Error/Warning list Status Display contents Function type Display the name of the executed function. Error/warning list Display the check results. Display "Error" or "Warning". Display "Check Warning" for the duplicated coil check/ladder program check/ consistency check warnings. Display data names with errors and warnings. Class Display check types such as the compilation and program check. Content Display descriptions of errors and warnings. Error Code Display error code numbers. 13 SETTING OPTIONS Data Name Display the total number of errors and warnings. APPENDIX A I INDEX Status 12 Content MONITORING Item Result 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Screen display EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 10.4 10 - 19 GX Works2 10 CONVERTING/COMPILING PROGRAMS 10.4.1 Correcting errors and warnings Check and correct errors/warnings. Operating procedure 1. Double-click the error/warning message displayed on the Output window. The corresponding error location in the program is displayed. Double-click 2. 10 - 20 Check the corresponding error location and correct the error as instructed by the error/warning message. 10.4.1 Correcting errors and warnings This chapter explains how to write/read sequence programs to/from the programmable controller CPU or memory card. For the overview of the data write/read operation, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 12 MONITORING 11 - 2 SETTING OPTIONS 13 A APPENDIX Writing/Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU I INDEX 11.1 11 - 1 GX Works2 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11.1 Writing/Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to write the Simple project data to the programmable controller CPU or memory card, and how to read the data from the programmable controller CPU or memory card to the project. For FXCPU projects with labels, created project data can be read from FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only. Screen display Select [Online] ⇒ [Write to PLC] ( )/[Read from PLC] ( ). <Write to PLC screen for the project without labels> Setting target module tab File list Memory capacity <Write to PLC screen for the project with labels> For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU/FXCPU (FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later), symbolic information is displayed on the file list. Setting target module tab File list Memory capacity 11 - 2 11.1 Writing/Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU Description Connection Channel List Display the information on the set connection destination. Setting target module tab Switch the setting target module. If the target data of write/read exists, the color of the tab name is displayed in blue. PLC Module Set to write the data to the programmable controller CPU. Intelligent Function Module*1 Set to write the data of the intelligent function module to buffer memory/flash ROM of the intelligent function module. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Display the title of the target memory by clicking the button. Option*2 Display Size File list Select this to display "Size" in the file list and the memory capacity. Select the data to be written/read. Target Memory Select the memory from the list ( ) by clicking the cell under "Target Memory". For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manual. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) - Writing Size Display the total size of written data selected in "Target". Free Volume Display the free space volume of the target memory. Use Volume Display the used space volume of the target memory. Not supported by FXCPU. Displayed only when writing data to the programmable controller PLC using a project with labels. For FXCPU, program size and symbolic information data size are displayed when executing the Write to PLC function. Symbolic information size is displayed on the screen for projects with labels of FX 3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only. When a program (program file), device comment, or device memory is selected, the range can be set by clicking the / button. When reading data from the programmable controller CPU, and the device memory is selected, the detailed settings are required. For details, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Click the button. When the Write to PLC function is executed, the specified data are written to the target memory. When the Read from PLC function is executed, the specified data are read from the target memory. 13 A I INDEX 2. 12 MONITORING Target Memory capacity*3 *1 : *2 : *3 : 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Title*1 10 SETTING OPTIONS Item CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Set the items on the screen. APPENDIX 1. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Operating procedure 11 - 3 GX Works2 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Screen button ● Displays the illustration of the connection channel list. ● Selects the parameters and all programs displayed on the list. ● Selects all data displayed on the list. ● Cancels the selection status of all data displayed on the list. ● / Switches display/hide of the Related functions button. For details of the related functions, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) ● (Read from PLC, Delete PLC Data only) Displays the project name of the symbolic information on the Title/Project Name column. It is not displayed for projects without labels and FXCPU. ● Updates file list on the Online Data Operation screen. For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, updates writing size, free space volume, and used space volume. When multiple personal computers are connected to the programmable controller CPU, update the target memory before reading data from the programmable controller CPU. 11 - 4 11.1 Writing/Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU The symbolic information is data that store the program configuration such as structures and labels. To restore these data included in the symbolic information when reading a program from the programmable controller CPU, write/read the symbolic information to/from the programmable controller CPU. Data such as structures and labels included in the symbolic information cannot be restored if only sequence programs are read. Included data Global label POU 11 Program WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Local label Function block Structure ● Compile status when the symbolic information is read • When the symbolic information and parameters are read simultaneously, and the data in the symbolic information match with parameters and programs (program files) on the programmable controller CPU, the read data are in compiled status. • When only the symbolic information is read, the read data are in uncompiled status. • When the symbolic information of GX Developer or GX IEC Developer is read, the read data are in uncompiled status. Compile the program again after executing the Read from PLC function. ● Considerations for reading symbolic information For the considerations for reading label programs (symbolic information) of the existing application using GX Works2, or reading label programs (symbolic information) of GX Works2 using the existing application, refer to the following manual. (GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)) ● For FXCPU • Symbolic information can be read from/write to a programmable controller CPU in a project of FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only. • When a memory cassette to which the symbolic information has been written is used on an FXCPU other than FX3U/ FX3UC version 3.00 or later, the memory cassette can be used, however, the symbolic information cannot be read from the memory cassette. When the symbolic information is written to a memory cassette on an FXCPU other than FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later, the symbolic information may be corrupted. ● Saving project automatically after writing data to programmable controller CPU A project can be saved automatically after writing data to the programmable controller CPU by setting the option. Select "Save project after writing to PLC" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Project" ⇒ "Automatic Save". 12 MONITORING Symbolic information 13 SETTING OPTIONS Item 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS The following table shows the program data included in the symbolic information. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Symbolic information A APPENDIX ■ INDEX I 11 - 5 GX Works2 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU MEMO 11 - 6 MONITORING 10 This chapter explains how to monitor the program execution status of the programmable controller CPU using the program editor. For the overview of monitoring, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 12 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 12.2 Changing Display Conditions of Monitoring 12 - 3 12.3 Monitoring Ladder Programs 12 - 6 12.4 Monitoring SFC Programs 12 - 13 12.5 Setting monitor condition/monitor stop condition 12 - 21 13 SETTING OPTIONS 12 - 2 A APPENDIX Starting and Stopping Monitoring Programs I INDEX 12.1 MONITORING 12 12 - 1 GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12.1 Starting and Stopping Monitoring Programs Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to monitor a program. Open the program editor to be monitored in advance. ■ Starting monitoring programs Start monitoring the program. Operating procedure • Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Start Monitoring] ( ). The monitoring starts. ■ Stopping monitoring programs Stop monitoring the program. Operating procedure • Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Stop Monitoring] ( ). The monitoring stops. ● Ladder editing mode when option is set When "Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor, Monitor (Write))" is selected in the option settings, since the ladder editing mode becomes 'monitor mode' when Start Monitoring is executed, ladder programs cannot be edited. Switch to 'monitor (write mode)' to edit the ladder programs. (Section 6.1.2) ● Changing current values During monitoring, bit devices can be forced ON/OFF and the current values of devices, buffer memories, and labels can be changed. For forcing bit devices ON/OFF and changing current values, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) ● ON/OFF status display During monitoring, the ON/OFF status of bit device is displayed as shown below. *1 *1 *1: Only comparison instructions that are equivalent to contacts, and SET, RST, PLS, PLF, SFT, SFTP, MC, FF, DELTA, and DELTAP instructions that are equivalent to coils are supported. ● Monitoring buffer memory and link memory To monitor the ON/OFF status of the buffer memory and link memory (example: U0\G0.1), select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Monitor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Operational Setting" and select "Monitor buffer memory and link memory". ● Monitoring in FX series The GX Works2 display format can be switched to the FXGP(DOS)/FXGP(WIN) display format in FX series. For details of switching the display format, refer to Section 12.2.3. 12 - 2 12.2 Changing Display Conditions of Monitoring 9 Changing Display Conditions of Monitoring Q CPU L CPU FX This section explains how to change the display conditions of monitoring. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 12.2 10 Changing current value display format (decimal/ hexadecimal) of word type variable CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 12.2.1 Change the current value display format of word type variable displayed during monitoring. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU ■ 11 Changing display format during monitoring Change the current value display format of word type variable during monitoring. Operating procedure Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Change Value Format (Decimal)] / [Change Value Format (Hexadecimal)]. 12 MONITORING • ■ SETTING OPTIONS 13 Changing display format before starting monitoring Change the current value display format by setting the option. The monitoring starts with the set display format. A Operating procedure APPENDIX Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Monitor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Display Format of Monitoring Value" ⇒ "Decimal"/"Hexadecimal". I Decimal Hexadecimal INDEX • 12.2.1 Changing current value display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of word type variable 12 - 3 GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12.2.2 Monitoring buffer memory and link memory Select whether to monitor the buffer memory and link memory at monitoring. The scan time of the programmable controller CPU can be reduced by not monitoring the buffer memory and link memory. For FXCPU, this function is supported by FX3U and FX3UC only. Operating procedure • 12 - 4 Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Monitor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Operational Setting", and select or clear "Monitor buffer memory and link memory". 12.2.2 Monitoring buffer memory and link memory 12.2 Changing Display Conditions of Monitoring Switch the GX Works2 display format to the FXGP(DOS)/FXGP(WIN) display format by setting the option. As either display is selected, it does not influence the actual FXCPU operations. Operating procedure • Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Monitor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Operational Setting" ⇒ "FXGP format Ladder monitor". EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Switching to FXGP(DOS)/ FXGP(WIN) display format (FXCPU) 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 12.2.3 Comparing monitor display Example MONITORING 12 <Monitor display for the PLS instruction> Actual input X0 ON Actual input X0 OFF 13 ON OFF ON Actual M0 output OFF ON Actual M0 output OFF PLS M0 Display screen FXGP(DOS), FXGP(WIN) format display SETTING OPTIONS GX Works2 format display ON PLS M0 Display screen OFF A ON OFF <Monitor display for the PLF instruction> GX Works2 format display Actual output M1 PLS M0 Display screen ON OFF ON OFF ON Actual input X1 OFF I ON Actual M1 output OFF PLS M0 Display screen INDEX ON Actual input X1 OFF FXGP(DOS), FXGP(WIN) format display APPENDIX ■ WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 ON OFF 12.2.3 Switching to FXGP(DOS)/ FXGP(WIN) display format (FXCPU) 12 - 5 GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12.3 Monitoring Ladder Programs This section explains how to monitor a ladder program. Open the program editor to be monitored in advance. 12.3.1 Monitoring ladder programs Q CPU L CPU Start monitoring a ladder program. Operating procedure • Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Start Monitoring] ( ). The monitoring starts. Displays ON/OFF status of contact/coil. ON : OFF : Displays current value of word device. 12 - 6 12.3.1 Monitoring ladder programs FX 12.3 Monitoring Ladder Programs EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 *1 *1: Only comparison instructions that are equivalent to contacts, and SET, RST, PLS, PLF, SFT, SFTP, MC, FF, DELTA, and DELTAP instructions that are equivalent to coils are supported. ● Word device monitor values When the current value is a large value, "..." is appended to the value as shown below to omit the following numbers. The omitted numbers can be checked by any of the following operations. • Place the cursor on the monitor value, and display the tooltip. • Select [View] ⇒ [Zoom]. • Select [View] ⇒ [Text Size] ⇒ [Smaller]. (Hold the key and rotate the mouse middle scroll button backward) ● Monitor display at use of master control instructions In GX Works2, the set/reset status of the master control is not displayed on the left power rail of the ladder program during monitoring. It is displayed on the title bar of the tab. 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS *1 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU ● ON/OFF status display During monitoring, the ON/OFF status of bit device is displayed as shown below. 12 MONITORING Set/reset status of the master control ● Monitoring values of indirectly specified devices When monitoring the indirectly specified devices, effective monitoring values are only word, even though double word unit is displayed. Effective monitoring value 13 SETTING OPTIONS Restrictions APPENDIX A INDEX I 12.3.1 Monitoring ladder programs 12 - 7 GX Works2 12 MONITORING ■ Displaying ON/OFF status with devices of contacts and coils Display the ON/OFF status with devices of contacts/coils being monitored by setting the option. Operating procedure • Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Monitor" ⇒ "Ladder" ⇒ "Operational Setting" ⇒ "Display monitored value by device/label name of contact/coil instruction". ● Available contact/coil instructions The following table shows the display availability of ON/OFF status of contact/coil instructions. : Available, ×: Not available Contact/coil instruction Toolbar Display availability of ON/OFF status Open contact Open contact branch Closed contact Closed contact branch Coil (except for Timer/Counter) Coil (Timer/Counter) × Application instruction × Rising pulse Falling pulse Rising pulse branch Falling pulse branch Rising pulse close Falling pulse close Rising pulse close branch Falling pulse close branch Operation result rising pulse Operation result falling pulse Invert operation results × MC display (read mode) - Bit display in comparison operation instruction - × Contact display in STL instruction - × ● ON/OFF status display During monitoring, the ON/OFF status is displayed as shown below. ON : OFF : 12 - 8 12.3.1 Monitoring ladder programs 12.3 Monitoring Ladder Programs Q CPU L CPU FX ■ 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Different sections of the same program can be monitored simultaneously by monitoring the program with the reference window. The reference window is displayed as another window of the active ladder editor. Note that the reference window can be displayed only when the ladder editor is not using any inline structured text program, and the program cannot be edited on the reference window. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Monitoring programs with reference window Open the reference window from ladder editor Screen display 11 Select [View] ⇒ [Open Other Windows] ⇒ [Open Reference Window]. Reference source window WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 12.3.2 Reference window MONITORING 12 SETTING OPTIONS 13 Restrictions A APPENDIX ● Considerations on the search function The search function can be used in the following conditions only. • When "(Current Window)" is selected for "Find In" on the Find/Replace screen. • When the screen for the simple search function is activated from the reference window. INDEX I 12.3.2 Monitoring programs with reference window 12 - 9 GX Works2 12 MONITORING ■ Updating the reference window Operating procedure • Select [View] ⇒ [Open Other Windows] ⇒ [Update Reference Window]. The program on the reference window is updated with the information edited on the reference source window. ■ Opening the reference source window Operating procedure • Select [View] ⇒ [Open Other Windows] ⇒ [Open Reference Source Window]. The reference source window is displayed. 12 - 10 12.3.2 Monitoring programs with reference window 12.3 Monitoring Ladder Programs 9 Monitoring registered ladder blocks Q CPU L CPU FX The Entry Ladder Monitor function allows monitoring ladder blocks of multiple programs in batch. Register and monitor ladder blocks of the ladder program on the Entry Ladder Monitor screen. Note that only ladder programs of project without labels can be registered. 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Registering and monitoring ladder blocks ■ EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 12.3.3 Register ladder blocks and monitor them. Screen display 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Entry Ladder Monitor]. Registered ladder block information Registered ladder block MONITORING 12 Display contents Registered ladder block information Registered ladder block 13 Description SETTING OPTIONS Item Display the information of registered ladder block in the following format. • 'program name' ('start step number' - 'end step number') Display the registered ladder block. The registered ladder blocks cannot be edited. Operating procedure Select a ladder block in the ladder program. 2. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Copy]. 3. Select [Edit] ⇒ [Paste] on the Entry Ladder Monitor screen. APPENDIX A 1. The copied ladder block is pasted. Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Start Monitoring] ( ). The monitoring of the registered ladder block starts. INDEX 4. I 12.3.3 Monitoring registered ladder blocks 12 - 11 GX Works2 12 MONITORING ● Applicable size for ladder block registration The maximum applicable size for the ladder block registration is 6k steps. ● Functions which can be performed on the Entry Ladder Monitor screen The following functions can be performed on the Entry Ladder Monitor screen. • Searching for devices, instructions, and character strings • Displaying comments, statements, and notes • Changing current values • Dragging and dropping ladder blocks/contacts/coils to the Watch window • Dragging and dropping ladder blocks/contacts/coils to the ladder editor ■ Deleting registered ladder blocks Delete registered ladder blocks. ● Deleting a specified ladder block Operation • Select a ladder block to be deleted, and select [Edit] ⇒ [Delete]. The specified ladder block is deleted. ● Deleting all ladder blocks Operation • Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Delete All Entry Ladder]. All registered ladder blocks are deleted. 12 - 12 12.3.3 Monitoring registered ladder blocks 12.4 Monitoring SFC Programs 9 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Monitoring SFC Programs This section explains how to monitor SFC diagrams and SFC block list of SFC program. Open the program editor to be monitored in advance. The monitoring of the Zoom editor window is same as monitoring of ladder programs. (Section 12.3) 12.4.1 10 Monitoring SFC diagrams Q CPU L CPU FX 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Monitor active steps, inactive steps, and steps being on hold on the SFC diagram. ■ Starting monitoring programs of SFC diagram Start monitoring the program of the SFC diagram. Operating procedure 12 Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Start Monitoring] ( ). MONITORING The monitoring starts. SETTING OPTIONS 13 APPENDIX A I Display contents Item *1 : INDEX • CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 12.4 Description (Blue) Active step (White) Inactive step (Yellow)*1 A step specified as a hold step and being on hold. Not supported by FXCPU. 12.4.1 Monitoring SFC diagrams 12 - 13 GX Works2 12 MONITORING ● Monitoring devices in MELSAP-L Use the Watch windows to monitor devices in MELSAP-L. For the method to monitor devices registered in the Watch windows, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Displaying start destination blocks ■ Display the start destination block when there is a block start step on the SFC diagram being monitored. Operating procedure • Move the cursor to the block start step, and select [View] ⇒ [Open Zoom/Start Destination Block]. The start destination block is displayed. ● Another method for displaying start destination blocks A start destination block can be also displayed by double-clicking the block start step while pressing the key. Auto scroll monitoring ■ Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when they are out of the screen during monitoring. Operating procedure 1. Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [SFC Auto Scroll] ( ). 2. Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Start Monitoring] ( ). While the auto scroll monitor function is activated, active steps are scrolled on to the screen automatically when they are out of the screen. 12 - 14 12.4.1 Monitoring SFC diagrams 12.4 Monitoring SFC Programs and the auto scroll monitor function is executed, the following message is displayed. If click the button, the SFC diagram and the Zoom editor window are synchronized, and the operation output/transition condition programs that correspond to the active steps are monitored automatically. If the button is clicked, only the SFC diagram is monitored. Note that the program cannot be edited on the Zoom editor window that is displayed when the auto scroll monitor function is activated. 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS The auto scroll monitor function also can be started by selecting [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [SFC Auto Scroll] ( ) during monitoring. ● When the auto scroll monitor function is disabled When [Start Monitoring (All Windows)] is selected while the auto scroll monitor function is being activated, the setting of the auto scroll monitor function is disabled and a normal monitoring starts. ● When multiple steps are active in series For multiple active steps in series caused by the stored operation steps, active steps close to initial steps are displayed when the auto scroll monitor function is activated. ● Operations when setting options When "Open Zoom with New Window" is selected under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Program Editor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "Zoom", 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU ● Starting method for the auto scroll monitor function EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 ● Displaying a start destination block and starting monitoring during the auto scroll monitoring. For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, when the active step is moved to the start destination block during the auto scroll monitoring, the SFC editor of the start destination block can be opened and monitored automatically by selecting "Monitor block start with new window" under [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Monitor" ⇒ "SFC" ⇒ "SFC Auto Scroll Setting". MONITORING 12 SETTING OPTIONS 13 APPENDIX A INDEX I 12.4.1 Monitoring SFC diagrams 12 - 15 GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12.4.2 Monitoring transitions Q CPU L CPU FX Monitor SFC steps that do not transfer after passing the specified time using the transition monitoring function. Operating procedure 1. Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options] ⇒ "Monitor" ⇒ "SFC", and set the items of "Transition Watch Monitor". For details of the setting items, refer to Section 13.2. 2. Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Start Monitoring] ( ). While the transition monitoring function is activated, the following warning message is displayed when an SFC step that does not transfer after passing the specified time is detected. Note that the display of the warning message may be delayed from the specified time depending on the operating system of the personal computer. • The corresponding SFC step on the SFC diagram is displayed by clicking the button. • When "Stop Transition Watch Monitor when Detected" is selected in the "Transition Watch Monitor" setting, the transition monitoring function is stopped by the detection of an error step, but the normal monitoring continues operating. 12 - 16 12.4.2 Monitoring transitions 12.4 Monitoring SFC Programs 9 Monitoring operation outputs and transition conditions Q CPU L CPU FX Monitor operation outputs/transition conditions of SFC steps/transitions on the Zoom editor window. 10 Operating procedure Select [View] ⇒ [Open Zoom/Start Destination Block]. CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 1. The Zoom editor window is displayed. Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Start Monitoring] ( ). The monitoring starts. For details of the monitoring, refer to Section 12.3. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 MONITORING 12 SETTING OPTIONS 13 APPENDIX A I INDEX 2. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 12.4.3 12.4.3 Monitoring operation outputs and transition conditions 12 - 17 GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12.4.4 Batch monitoring all blocks, monitoring active steps Q CPU L CPU FX Monitor the active/inactive status of all blocks and step active/inactive status of the specified block in the list display during the execution of the SFC program. Batch monitoring all blocks ■ Monitor the active/inactive status of all blocks in the list display. Operating procedure • Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [SFC All Block Batch Monitoring] ( The SFC All Block Batch Monitoring screen is displayed. Display contents Item Description Block No. Display the block number at the cursor position. Data Name Display the data name of the block. Title Display the title of the block. Screen button ● Monitors the SFC step active/inactive status of the specified block. ■ Monitoring SFC step active/inactive status of the specified block 12 - 18 12.4.4 Batch monitoring all blocks, monitoring active steps ). 12.4 Monitoring SFC Programs 9 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Monitoring SFC step active/inactive status of the specified block Monitor the SFC step active/inactive status in the list display. Operating procedure Place the cursor at the block to be monitored on the SFC All Block Batch Monitoring screen, and click the 10 button. The Active Step Monitor screen is displayed. If the program is monitored with the programmable controller CPU that is never set to RUN after its reset, all SFC steps are displayed as uncreated steps. If the program is monitored with the programmable controller CPU set to STOP, the status at the STOP setting is displayed as the monitoring result. WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 MONITORING 12 SETTING OPTIONS 13 APPENDIX A I INDEX • CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS ■ 12.4.4 Batch monitoring all blocks, monitoring active steps 12 - 19 GX Works2 12 MONITORING 12.4.5 Monitoring SFC block list Q CPU L CPU FX Monitor an SFC block list. Operating procedure 1. Select [View] ⇒ [Open SFC Blocklist]. The SFC block list is displayed. 2. Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Start Monitoring] ( ). The columns of the active block are displayed in blue. When the block information is set, the ON/OFF status of the block information device/label can be checked on the SFC block list. When the block information is not set, the program is not monitored. By double-clicking the block column during monitoring, the SFC diagram of the specified block is displayed. 12 - 20 12.4.5 Monitoring SFC block list 12.5 Setting monitor condition/monitor stop condition *1 Q CPU L CPU FX *1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00UJCPU, Q00UCPU, and Q01UCPU. 10 Set a monitoring condition or monitoring stop condition. This function starts or stops monitoring when the specified condition is satisfied. Screen display Select [Online] ⇒ [Monitor] ⇒ [Monitor Condition Setting]/[Monitor Stop Condition Setting]. ● Monitoring condition setting 11 < SFC diagram > WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU < Ladder, SFC (Zoom) > EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Setting monitor condition/monitor stop condition CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 12.5 MONITORING 12 ● Monitoring stop condition setting 13 SETTING OPTIONS < SFC diagram > APPENDIX A I INDEX < Ladder, SFC (Zoom) > 12.4.5 Monitoring SFC block list 12 - 21 GX Works2 12 MONITORING Operating procedure 1. Set the items on the screen. Item Device Description Select this to set a device/label for condition. Select this to set a word device. Enter a device/label for "Device/Label". Word Device Enter a value for "Condition", and select decimal or hexadecimal by clicking . When setting a monitoring stop condition, select 16-bit integer, 32-bit integer, or actual number by clicking Bit Device . Select this to set a bit device. Enter a device/label for "Device/Label", and select ↑ (Rise) or ↓ (Fall) for "Condition" by clicking . Select this to set a step number for condition. Step No.*1 Block No.*2 *1 : *2 : 2. Enter a step number, and select ↑ (Rise), ↓ (Fall), ON, OFF, or Always by clicking . When "Always" is selected, the condition is not satisfied if the specified step number is skipped. Select this to set a block number for condition. Enter a block number. Step Select this to set a step number or transition condition number of SFC diagram. Enter a step number or a transition condition number, and enter a step number of SFC (Zoom). Transition Select ↑ (Rise), ↓ (Fall), ON, OFF, or Always by clicking . When "Always" is selected, the condition is not satisfied if the specified step number is skipped. For ladder programs and SFC (Zoom) programs only For SFC programs only Click the button. The monitor condition/monitor stop condition is registered. Click the button before closing the Monitor Condition Setting screen or Monitor Stop Condition Setting screen. Screen button ● Cancels the registered condition. ● Monitoring condition setting/monitoring stop condition setting • Monitoring values are not updated by registering a monitor condition. They are updated when the registered condition is satisfied. • Devices of inline structured text cannot be set for a monitor condition or monitor stop condition. • A monitoring condition or monitoring stop condition cannot be set if the display format of SFC is MELSAP-L. Change the display format to MELSAP3. (Section 2.3.7) • When "Device" is selected, or both "Device" and "Step No." are selected, monitoring may not be stopped at the first satisfaction of the condition after the monitoring stop condition is set. ● For High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and Redundant CPU • A monitor condition or monitor stop condition cannot be set when any of the following communication routes are used between a programmable controller CPU and a connection target. • CC-Link IE Field Network • Ethernet • CC-Link • C24 • When an online operation such as an SFC program monitoring is performed on the same network while registering the monitor condition, the canceling process of the monitor condition may require longer time. 12 - 22 12.4.5 Monitoring SFC block list SETTING OPTIONS 10 This chapter explains the functions of options for setting screen display format or detailed operations of each function. CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 13 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 13.2 Option Setting List 13 - 3 13 SETTING OPTIONS 13 - 2 A APPENDIX Basic Operations I INDEX 13.1 MONITORING 12 13 - 1 GX Works2 13 SETTING OPTIONS 13.1 Basic Operations Q CPU L CPU This section explains how to set options. Screen display Select [Tool] ⇒ [Options]. Operating procedure • Set the items on the screen. When the cursor is placed on a setting item, an explanation of the item is displayed on the "Explanation" field. Details of the setting items Section 13.2 Screen button ● Restores the initial settings. ● Restores the user default settings. ● Stores the current settings as the user default and applies them to a new project. 13 - 2 FX 13.2 Option Setting List FX The following table shows the option setting items. For the default setting of each item, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) For "(Common)", "(FB)", "(Structured)" indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals respectively. … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common). … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) Tree item Item Reference/reflect the other, when device comment is not set. All Editors Device Comment Set a reference/reflection target of device comments for each program/program file. Set a reference/reflection target according to the local device range of PLC parameter when set to "PLC parameter setting". Within the local device range: local device comment Outside the local device range: global device comment 12 When it is checked, the behavior of each device will be the one as follows: (1) Refer the comment (Global/Local) specified in device comment field. (2) If device comment does not exist, the behavior will be the one as follows: MONITORING Specify the reference/ reflection target 13 • When specified to Global Comment: Refer Local Comment. • When specified to Local Comment: Refer Global Comment. 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common). Program/Program File Name Program Editor Reference (Common) Apply the current setting of reference/ reflection target for device comment to all programs/program files. Set all reference/reflection target to 'global' for device comment of selected program/ program file name. A Set a all reference/reflection target to 'local' for device comment of selected program/ program file name. APPENDIX Project Explanation Set all reference/reflection targets for device comment of target device of the selected program/program file name to "PLC parameter setting". Target Device: Device can be specified within the local device range in the device setting of PLC parameter I INDEX (Common) (FB) (Structured) 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Q CPU L CPU EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 Option Setting List SETTING OPTIONS 13.2 13 - 3 GX Works2 13 SETTING OPTIONS Tree item Item Explanation Check duplicated coil Section 6.2.3 Enter label comment and device comment Select whether to enter label comment or device comment continuously after entering instructions. Section 6.2.4 Do not display note in Select whether to display note in Enter Enter Symbol screen Symbol screen when edit coil instructions. when edit coil instructions. Ladder/SFC Enter ladder Program Editor Reference Select whether to check duplicated coils when entering instruction. Unconverted ladder is not the object for duplicated coil check. Check special relay/ special register compatible with A-PLC When A-PLC Compatible Setting of PLC Parameter setting has not be enabled at the time of instruction inputting, check whether to display a confirming message to input special relay/special register compatible with A-PLC. MELSAP-L is an exception. Display available instruction tool hints in entering instruction Select whether to automatically display available instruction tool hints in entering instruction. Display available instructions in entering instruction Select whether to automatically display available instructions in entering instruction. Display available labels in entering instruction Select whether to automatically display available defined labels in entering instruction. - - Section 6.2.1 Monitored Value Class Device Device Comment Data Type Ladder/SFC Tool hint Constant Value Select display item in tool hint when mouse cursor is placed over label name. * Options for simple project (with label) or label program of structured project. * As for function block, devices are excluded from display target in tool hint. Label Comment Remark Tool hint display format 13 - 4 Select the number of display lines in tool hint. * Will be wrapped in 64 single-byte characters or 32 double-byte characters. Section 2.2.10 13.2 Option Setting List Note Select whether to display the note comment at ladder editor. Statement Select whether to display the statement comment at ladder editor. Device Comment Display Format Set the display rows and columns for label comment or device comment. Section 2.2.6 Copy device comment in copying ladder Select whether to copy device comment in copying ladder. * Pasting device comments will be executed based on the setting of Reference/ Reflection target for device comment. * Pasting device comments will not be executed between different PLC types. * Copying or pasting will not be executed for read-protected device comments. Section 6.11.5 Display Connection of Ladder Diagram Set the number of contacts. ([Program Editor] ⇒ [SFC] ⇒ [Zoom]) Section 2.2.7 Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor, Monitor (Write)) Select whether to switch Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor and Monitor (Write)). Will be the same operation as the ladder edit mode of GX Developer. *Unable to set when security setting is enabled. Section 6.1.2 Display labels and devices Select whether to display labels, and devices assigned to label. (Exclude function block.) * Devices are excluded from Find/Replace target. * Options for simple project (with label) or label program of structured project. Section 2.2.9 Display STL instruction in contact format *FXCPU Only Select whether to display STL instruction in contact format. This is valid for simple projects (Not using labels) only. Contact format ladder block display for STL instruction is not wrap displayed. Section 2.2.12 Display Instruction Help at Select whether to automatically display symbol error occurrence Instruction Help when symbol errors occur. Section 6.2.2 Open Undefined Label Registration dialog at ladder entry Select whether to open Undefined Label Registration dialog when labels used at ladder entry are undefined. Section 6.2.1 Set initial value to '1' for Enter HLine/Delete HLine dialogue. Select whether to set initial value to '1' when Enter HLine/Delete HLine dialog is opened. Ladder Ladder Diagram Stop at the connection Select whether to edit line by connection points (Instruction/Vertical point (Instruction/Vertical Line) when Enter Line) when enter or delete HLine/Delete HLine is executed. horizontal line. Section 2.2.4 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Select whether to display the label comment or the device comment at ladder editor. 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Device Comment 9 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 12 MONITORING Program Editor Reference 13 Section 6.6.2 A I INDEX Comment Explanation SETTING OPTIONS Item APPENDIX Tree item 13 - 5 GX Works2 13 SETTING OPTIONS Tree item Item Explanation Reference Monitored Value Class Device Address Data Type Select display item in tool hint when mouse cursor is placed over label/device name. Constant Value Comment Remark ST*1 SFC Comment Program Editor Tool Hint Display Format Select display lines on tool hint. Auto Indention Select whether to use the automatic indent when beginning a new line after entering ST control syntax such as IF or FOR, and when displaying template of inline structured text. Instruction/label name prediction Select whether to display listed label names starting with the input character when a character is input. (Structured text: label name, inline structured text: instruction and label name) Tabulator Length in ST Set tabulator length. It is not available with inline structured text. Block List Display device comment on SFC block list. Section 7.11 Step/Transition Display step/transition comment on SFC editor. Section 2.3.5 SFC Edit Area Set SFC edit area when create SFC. Please change by "SFC Row Setting" after creating a SFC. Section 2.3.6 Tile SFC and Zoom vertically SFC 1 SFC 2 Zoom Device Comment Editor 13 - 6 Select whether to tile Zoom windows at the cursor position on SFC when creating SFC diagram. Checking this option changes the [Open Zoom with New Window] option into unchecked. Arrange Select the type of tile for SFC and ZOOM window. SFC Display Window Ratio Select window display ratio for SFC when Tile Vertically is selected. MELSAP-L label/device Display Format Set display lines for MELSAP-L program. Jump to start destination block Set whether to jump to start destination block when cursor is moved to block start step. Leave comment or step No. selected Select whether to leave comment or step No. selected in Enter SFC symbol window when changing SFC symbol in MELSAP3. Block or symbol must be left selected in Enter SFC symbol window when newly entering SFC symbol. Open Zoom with New Window Select whether to open a new window for each Zoom or to change the display in the fixed window when opening Zoom. Checking this option changes the "Tile SFC and Zoom vertically" option into unchecked. Number of Action/ Transition Contacts Set the number of contacts. SFC (Structured) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Section 7.9 Section 2.2.7 13.2 Option Setting List Select whether to copy the texts in the upper row after incrementing it when inserting a row. Copy data type/comment items Select if the data type, comment, and remark shall be object for auto copy. Default Length of String Data Type Set the default string length for string data type. Section 5.5.3 Display last blank row Select whether to display last blank row. This setting is valid for global label and local label except the local label of function block, function and structured data type. Section 5.5.5 Section 5.5.5 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Monitor Ladder Set automatic registration destination Display Format of Monitoring Value Select the display format of the monitored value in decimal or hexadecimal. Section 12.2.1 Monitor buffer memory and link memory * Only applies to the QCPU, LCPU, FX3U(C) Select whether to monitor buffer memory and link memory during Ladder-monitoring. Scan time of PLC will be lengthened depending on the setting. Section 12.2.2 FXGP format Ladder monitor * Only applies to the FXCPU PLS/PLF instruction is displayed in GP(DOS) and FXGP(WIN) formats. If it is not checked, it is displayed in GX Developer form. Section 12.2.3 Display monitored value by device/label name of contact/coil instruction. In monitoring ladder, select whether to highlight contact/coil instruction based on the monitored value displayed by device/ label name. Section 12.3.1 Display lines for monitoring current value Select whether to display rows of the current value monitor during Laddermonitoring. Section 12.2.3 10 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 (Common) 12 13 A APPENDIX Ladder/SFC Ladder block label (ladder) contained in cursor, labels of action/transition step (SFC), or device will be registered to watch window in automatic registration destination while monitoring watch window. (Caution1: Cursor move will be slow when setting is enabled. 2: Select FB instance for function block.) EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Automatic copy and increment when inserting a row 9 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Reference I INDEX Parameter Explanation MONITORING Label Setting Editor Item SETTING OPTIONS Tree item 13 - 7 GX Works2 13 SETTING OPTIONS Tree item Item Explanation Display Format of Monitoring Value Select whether to display monitored value in Decimal or Hexadecimal. Monitor buffer memory and link memory * QCPU, LCPU, FX3U(C) only Select whether to monitor buffer memory and link memory during monitoring. Scan time of PLC will be lengthened depending on the setting. Character String Monitor Setting Set the number of displayable characters to monitor character-string data. • When "Always Verify with PLC" is selected. Verify with PLC before starting monitoring. However, do not verify if simulator is running, selecting uncompiled program's POU, or unchanged POU. (Last verification status is held while editor is open.) ST*1 Verify with PLC setting before starting monitoring (Structured) • When "Not Always Verify with PLC" is selected. Start monitoring without verifying with PLC. • When "Confirm whether to Verify with PLC" is selected. Show a confirmation box whether to verify with PLC before starting monitoring. However, the confirmation box will not be displayed and do not verify if simulator is running, selecting uncompiled program's POU, or unchanged POU. (Last verification status is held while editor is open.) Monitor SFC*1 Watch Step Not Transferring within Watching Time Select whether to display a warning dialog when detect a step that does not transfer even if specified time passes while monitoring. Program/ Program File Name Select watch target program/program file. Target All Blocks Specify watch target block. Specify the Block Specify watch target block. Stop Transition Watch Monitor when Detected Select whether to detect other step that does not transfer while displaying warning dialog. Monitor block start with new window Select whether to open a corresponding SFC window to monitor when the active step transfers to a block start step. Section 12.4.2 PLC Read/Write Online Change Symbolic Information 13 - 8 Reference GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Section 12.4.1 13.2 Option Setting List Reference Function Block Call Enable calling function block from ladder to ST or vice versa, from ladder to Structured Ladder/FBD or vice versa, using inline ST in ladder, reducing steps when using function block. *Input label for VAR_IN_OUT remains equal to output label. (Structured) Program Check Check when program check is not needed after Build or Online Program Change. It can reduce the compile time depending on the setting. Operational Setting Select whether to use the same label name in global label and local label. When the same label is selected, local label will be given priority. Build Cross Reference Information Creating cross reference information after completion of compiling enables to reduce find time for cross reference. Cross reference information can be found even the project is uncompiled. Specified find conditions will be treated as filter conditions. This setting will be canceled when find mode in cross reference condition setting is set to 'Fast Find'. Stop Build Set the number of error and warning to stop the compile. Disable Warning and Notification Message Register warning codes to invalidate. The registered warning code shall not be displayed in output window. Compile Output Result Display the Use Status Notification of Automatic-Assign Device in Output Result The use status of device automatic-assign is displayed in output window. Use lower-case device names as labels*2 Select whether to use device names typed with lower case as labels. Only the device name outside device range is valid for Inline Structured Text. Function Output Setting Select whether to connect directly from the objective function output to other input. Allow VAR_OUTPUT at FB call (ST) Select whether to allow VAR_OUTPUT at FB call. Check: Able to specify VAR_OUTPUT as FB argument. (e.g. FBInst(FBVarOUT:= Variable);) Uncheck: Compile error C8015 returns if VAR_OUTPUT is specified as FB argument. Compile Condition 1 ST*1 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 - (Common) WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 12 Section 10.4.1 MONITORING Basic Setting 9 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Explanation - 13 (Structured) SETTING OPTIONS Item A Section 10.2.4 APPENDIX Tree item (D)INT_TO_BOOL_E, (D)WORD_TO_BOOL_E, TIME_TO_BOOL_E I NOT_E LIMITAION_E, MAXIMUM_E, MINIMUM_E Select whether to generate a code to keep bit type output of objective function. (Structured) INDEX Compile Condition 2 EQ_E,NE_E, GT_E, GE_E, LT_E, LE_E AND_E, OR_E, XOR_E Intelligent Function Module*1 iQ Works Interaction*1, *3 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) 13 - 9 GX Works2 13 SETTING OPTIONS Tree item Item Explanation Reference Use MELSOFT Navigator Option Information Checking this option enables use of the option setting of MELSOFT Navigator. The option setting specified in MELSOFT Navigator at the time of opening this project is used. Section 5.2 System Label Name Setting Set how to name system labels. When system labels are entered, system label names are determined based on this setting at the time of project save. System Label Setting*3, *4 Sampling Trace *1 : *2 : *3 : *4 : 13 - 10 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Not supported by FXCPU. Not supported by Simple project. Not supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU. For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only. APPENDIX SETTING OPTIONS MONITORING Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys INDEX WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS APPENDIX EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 10 11 12 App - 2 13 A I App - 1 GX Works2 APPENDIX Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys Q CPU L CPU FX This section shows the list of toolbars and shortcut keys that can be used in Simple project. For details of functions which are not described in this section, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) For "(Common)", "(FB)", "(Structured)", indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals respectively: (Common) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) (FB) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block) (Structured) … GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys The following explains the toolbars that are available regardless of the editing target and the corresponding shortcut keys. ■ "Program Common" toolbar icons The following table shows the "Program Common" toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys. Toolbar icon Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference + Cut + Copy Copy the selected data. + Paste Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor position. + Undo Cancel the previous operation. + Redo Perform the operation canceled by [Undo]. - Write to PLC Write data to the programmable controller CPU. - Read from PLC Read data from the programmable controller CPU. - Start Monitoring (All Windows) Start monitoring all windows being opened. - Stop Monitoring (All Windows) Stop monitoring all windows being opened. Start Monitoring Start monitoring the window being operated. + Stop Monitoring Stop monitoring the window being operated. Build Convert/compile the program being edited. Section 10.2.1 Online Program Change Convert/compile a sequence program and write it to the programmable controller CPU. (Common) Compile/convert all programs in the project. Section 10.2.2 + + + Rebuild All App - 2 Description Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys Cut the selected data. Section 6.11 Section 6.12 - Section 11.1 (Common) Section 12.1 Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys ■ Shortcut key - - Select data type - - Select data name Corresponding menu Description Select a data type and data name to be displayed. - Display Display the editing screen of the selected data type and data name. - Navigation Display/hide the Navigation window. - Selection Display/hide the Function Block Selection window. - Output Display/hide the Output window. Reference (Common) (Common) (FB) Section 10.4 Other shortcut keys The following table shows other shortcut keys that are available regardless of the editing target. Toolbar icon Shortcut key - - Corresponding menu Rename Rename (Library) Delete Description Change the name of the selected data or library on the Navigation window. Reference (Common) (Structured) 10 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Toolbar icon 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU The following table shows the "Docking Window/Switch Project Data" toolbar icons. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 "Docking Window/Switch Project Data" toolbar icons 12 Delete the selected data. - + + Copy Copy data in the project. - + + Paste Paste the copied data to a folder. (Common) MONITORING ■ SETTING OPTIONS 13 APPENDIX A INDEX I Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys App - 3 GX Works2 APPENDIX Appendix 1.2 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for setting labels. "Label" toolbar icons ■ The following table shows the "Label" toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys. Toolbar icon Shortcut key Corresponding menu + New Declaration (Before) Add a row above the cursor position. New Declaration (After) Add a row below the cursor position. Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor position. - Read from CSV File Read label settings from the CSV file. - Write to CSV File Write label settings to the CSV file. - Confirm Update of System Label Database Apply system label information changed in another project to global labels. - Import System Label Import system label information and apply it to global labels. - Reservation to Register System Label Reserve the selected global label for registration as a system label. - Reservation to Release System Label Reserve the selected global label for deregistration of system label. + Description Reference Section 5.5.5 Section 5.9 Section 5.2 Other shortcut keys ■ The following table shows other shortcut keys for setting labels. Toolbar icon Shortcut key - + - + / + Num *1 - Display all lines of comment and remark of the selected line. - + / + Num *1 - Display only the first line of comment and remark of the selected line. *1 : App - 4 Corresponding menu Select All Description Reference Select all rows. 'Num' indicates keys in the numeric keypad. Appendix 1.2 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels Section 5.5.5 Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys "Ladder" toolbar icons and shortcut keys The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the ladder editor. Description Open Contact Insert an open contact at the cursor position. + Open Branch Insert an open contact branch at the cursor position. Close Contact Insert a closed contact at the cursor position. Close Branch Insert a closed contact branch at the cursor position. Coil Insert a coil at the cursor position. Application Instruction Insert an application instruction at the cursor position. Horizontal Line Insert a horizontal line at the cursor position. + Vertical Line Insert a vertical line at the cursor position. + Delete Horizontal Line Delete the horizontal line at the cursor position. + Delete Vertical Line Delete the vertical line at the cursor position. + Rising Pulse Insert a rising pulse at the cursor position. + Falling Pulse Insert a falling pulse at the cursor position. + Rising Pulse Branch Insert a rising pulse branch at the cursor position. + Falling Pulse Branch Insert a falling pulse branch at the cursor position. + + + Rising Pulse Close Insert a rising pulse close at the cursor position. + + Falling Pulse Close Insert a falling pulse close at the cursor position. + + Rising Pulse Close Branch Insert a rising pulse close branch at the cursor position. + + Falling Pulse Close Branch Insert a falling pulse close branch at the cursor position. + Operation Result Rising Pulse Insert an operation result rising pulse at the cursor position. ++ Operation Result Falling Pulse Insert an operation result falling pulse at the cursor position. + + Invert Operation Results Reference 11 Section 6.2 12 Section 6.6.2 Section 6.8.2 13 A Section 6.2 I Insert an operation result inversion at the cursor position. Edit Line Input a line at the cursor position. Section 6.6 + Delete Line Delete a line at the cursor position. Section 6.8 + Insert Inline Structured Text Box Insert an inline structured text box. Section 6.4.2 Device Comment Edit device comments. - WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Corresponding menu SETTING OPTIONS Shortcut key APPENDIX Toolbar icon 10 MONITORING ■ EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for program editors. 9 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors (Common) App - 5 INDEX Appendix 1.3 GX Works2 APPENDIX Toolbar icon Shortcut key Corresponding menu Reference - Statement Edit statements. - Note Edit notes. - Statement/Note Batch Edit Batch edit statements/notes. Section 9.3 Line Statement List Display the list of line statements used in the program. Section 9.6 + + + Display Template Mark Template (Left) Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the left by selecting the menu each time. + Mark Template (Right) Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the right by selecting the menu each time. + Read Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode". Write Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode". Monitor Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor Mode" during monitoring. Monitor (Write Mode) Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor (Write Mode)" during monitoring. + + Device Display - Section 9.2 Insert a template corresponds to the instruction/function/control syntax. + + App - 6 Description (Structured) Section 6.1.2 Section 12.2 Display devices assigned by compilation. Section 2.2.8 Zoom Change the display magnification ratio of the ladder program. Section 2.2.2 Continuous Paste Increment device numbers of cut/copied ladder block and paste it consecutively. Section 6.11.4 Insert a row at the cursor position. - ++ - + Insert Row - + Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor position. - + Insert Column Insert a column at the cursor position. - + Delete Column Delete the column at the cursor position. - Connect Line to Right-Side ++ Symbol - ++ - Section 6.9 Connect a horizontal line to the element at the right of the cursor position. Connect Line to Left-Side Symbol Connect a horizontal line to the element at the left of the cursor position. + Enter/Delete HLine Rightward Enter/delete a line at the right of the cursor position. - + Enter/Delete HLine Leftward Enter/delete a line at the left of the cursor position. - + Enter/Delete VLine Downward Enter/delete a line at the downward of the cursor position. - + Enter/Delete VLine Upward Enter/delete a line at the upward of the cursor position. - + Switch Open/Close Contact Switch a open contact to closed contact, and vice versa. - + Switch Statement/Note Type Change the type of a statement/note. Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors Section 6.6 (Common) Section 9.4 Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys - Select a device/label on the Enter Symbol screen. Switch the device/label to be selected using the / button. - + / - Increment/decrement a device/label on the Enter Symbol screen. - + - Display options of instruction/label on the Enter Symbol screen. - + /// - Move the cursor on the editing screen while the Enter Symbol screen is displayed. - + - ++ Jump to Next Ladder Block Start Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the next ladder block. - Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the previous ladder block. - ++ Next Device Move the cursor to the same device as the one at the cursor position. - ++ Next Contact Move the cursor to the contact where the same device as the one at the cursor position is used. - ++ Next Coil Move the cursor to the coil where the same device as the one at the cursor position is used. - ++ Back Return the cursor to the previous position before the [Next Device]/[Next Contact]/ [Next Coil] function execution. - + Comment Display device comments. - + Statement Display statements. - + Note Display notes. - + / + Num *1 Non-Display Ladder Block Hide a ladder block. - + / + Num *1 Display Ladder Block Display a hidden ladder block. - - ++ - + - ++ /// - + - - - ++ Section 6.5 Section 8.1.2 Section 2.2.4 Section 2.2.11 + turn mouse Bigger scroll wheel upward + turn mouse scroll wheel downward Section 8.1.3 Change the display size of text larger on the editing screen. Section 2.2.3 Smaller Change the display size of text smaller on the editing screen. Tile FB Horizontally Tile the ladder editor and the function block program editor horizontally. (FB) Back to Zoom SFC Block Open the SFC diagram corresponds to the program on the Zoom editor window. Section 7.9 Moves up/ down/ left/ right Move the cursor toward up/down/left/right of the SFC diagram. - Open Instruction Help Instruction Help - Display the Instruction Help screen. Section 6.2.2 Display the Find screen. Section 8.1.1 Display details of instructions. (Common) Enter an assignment operator (:=) when editing the inline structured text program. (Structured) 'Num' indicates keys in the numeric keypad. Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors 10 11 12 MONITORING Display the specified row. Jump to Previous Ladder ++ Block Start - *1 : Jump Section 6.2 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES + / Open the Enter Symbol screen in which the first argument is in the selected status. 9 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS - Instruction Partial Edit Reference WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU ++ Description App - 7 13 SETTING OPTIONS - Corresponding menu A APPENDIX Shortcut key I INDEX Toolbar icon GX Works2 APPENDIX ■ "SFC" toolbar icons and shortcut keys The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the SFC editor. Toolbar icon Shortcut key Description Reference [STEP] New Step Insert at the cursor position. [B] Block Start Step (with END check) Insert at the cursor position. [BS] Block Start Step (without END check) Insert at the cursor position. [JUMP] Jump Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.8 [END] END Step Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.9 [DUMMY] Dummy Step Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.1 [TR] Transition Insert at the cursor position. Section 7.3.3 [--D] Selection Divergence Insert a selection divergence. Section 7.3.4 [==D] Simultaneous Divergence Insert a simultaneous divergence. Section 7.3.5 [--C] Selection Convergence Insert a selection convergence. [==C] Simultaneous Convergence Insert a simultaneous convergence. [ | ] Vertical Line Insert a vertical line. + No Attribute Set the step attribute to No Attribute. + Stored Coil Set the step attribute to Stored Coil. + Stored Operation (without Transition Check) Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (SE). + Stored Operation (with Transition Check) Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (ST). + Reset Reset the step attribute. + Vertical Line (Draw Line) Insert at the cursor position. + Selection Divergence (Draw Line) Insert at the cursor position. + Simultaneous Divergence (Draw Line) Insert at the cursor position. + Selection Convergence (Draw Line) Insert at the cursor position. + Simultaneous Convergence (Draw Line) Insert at the cursor position. + Delete Line Delete a line at the cursor position. Section 7.4 - SFC Step/ Transition Comment Edit the SFC step/transition comments. Section 9.8 - Sort SFC Step No. Sort the SFC block step numbers. Section 7.7 - SFC All Block Batch Monitoring Batch monitor all blocks in the SFC program. Section 12.4.4 - SFC Auto Scroll Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when they are out of the screen during monitoring. Section 12.4.1 + Read Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode". Write Mode Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode". + + + App - 8 Corresponding menu Section 7.3.1 Section 7.3.2 Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors Section 7.3.6 Section 7.3.10 Section 7.5 Section 7.3.10 Section 6.1.2 Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor (Write Mode)" during monitoring. Zoom Change the display magnification ratio of the SFC diagram. + turn mouse Bigger scroll wheel upward Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen. - + turn mouse scroll wheel downward Smaller Reduce the text display size on the editing screen. Insert Row Insert a row at the cursor position. - + Section 12.2 Section 2.3.2 Section 2.3.3 - + Delete Row Delete the row at the cursor position. - + Insert Column Insert a column at the cursor position. - + Delete Column Delete the column at the cursor position. Section 8.2.1 Section 7.3.11 - + Jump Move the cursor to the SFC step number/ transition number in the specified block. - + Find Jump Step Move the cursor to the step of the jump source. Section 8.2.2 - Numeric key Move the cursor to the SFC step number/ transition number. Section 8.2.3 Convert a single block only. Section 10.1.4 Display the SFC step/transition comments. Section 2.3.5 - + + Convert Block + SFC Step/ Transition Comment + / Open Zoom/Start + double-click Destination Block - - + - - Back to Start SFC Block + + Program Display Display the Zoom editor window or the start destination block. Display the start destination block. Section 7.9 Section 2.3.4 SFC block list shortcut keys The following table shows the shortcut keys for the SFC block list. Shortcut key - + - Numeric key - + Corresponding menu SFC Block List Comment 12 A Description Jump to the specified block number/data name. Jump 11 Reference Section 8.2.1 Jump to the selected block number. Display comments of the SFC block list. Section 7.11 I INDEX Toolbar icon 10 13 Display the start source block. Display programs on the SFC diagram when editing in MELSAP-L. EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Monitor (Write Mode) - - ■ Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor Mode" during monitoring. 9 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS - Monitor Mode Reference WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU + Description MONITORING Corresponding menu SETTING OPTIONS Shortcut key APPENDIX Toolbar icon Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors App - 9 GX Works2 APPENDIX ■ Other shortcut keys The following table shows other shortcut keys for program editors. App - 10 Toolbar icon Shortcut key Corresponding menu - /// - Move the cursor in the arrow direction. - - Scroll up the screen. - - Scroll down the screen. - + - Scroll the screen to the left. - + - Scroll the screen to the right. - - Move the cursor to its leftmost position in the row. - - Move the cursor to its rightmost position in the row. - + - Move the cursor to the start of the program. - + - Move the cursor to the end of the program. - + /// - Set a range. - ++ - Select the range from the current position up to the start of the program. - ++ - Select the range from the current position down to the end of the program. - - Delete the selected target. Description Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors Reference - INDEX APPENDIX SETTING OPTIONS MONITORING WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS INDEX EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES 9 10 11 12 13 A I Index - 1 GX Works2 INDEX [A] Action/Transition ................................7-24, 7-31, 7-32, 7-34 Active step ................................................................... 12-13 Active Step Monitor ...................................................... 12-19 Application Instruction ...................................................... 6-6 Array Element .......................................................5-15, 5-27 arrays ............................................................................. 5-15 Auto scroll monitoring .................................................. 12-14 Automatic-Assign ..................................................5-29, 5-30 [B] Batch deleting NOPs ...................................................... 6-47 Batch Editing Statements and Notes ............................. 9-13 Batch inserting NOPs ..................................................... 6-46 bit device of word device ................................................ 5-28 Block Information ........................................................... 7-41 Block Information Find Device ....................................... 8-13 block start step .......................................... 7-12, 7-35, 12-14 Block title ........................................................................ 7-42 buffer memory ................................................................ 13-7 Build All .......................................................................... 10-2 [C] Change SFC Step No. ................................................... 8-11 Changing I/O No. ............................................................. 8-6 Changing the type .......................................................... 9-15 Changing the Type (PLC/Peripheral) ............................. 9-21 Check Program .............................................................. 10-4 Checking for Errors ...................................................... 10-19 Checking for Warnings ................................................. 10-19 Checking the compilation status .................................. 10-11 Class ............................................................... 5-4, 5-8, 5-10 Close Branch ................................................................... 6-6 Close Contact .................................................................. 6-6 Coil ................................................................................... 6-6 Column ............................................................................. 2-8 Comment ...............................................5-4, 5-8, 5-10, 5-23 comment that is appended ............................................... 9-3 Compile .................................................................10-5, 13-9 Compile Condition .......................................................... 13-9 Consecutive entry button ................................................. 6-7 Considerations for replacing ............................................ 8-7 Consistency (pair) check ................................................ 10-4 contact ............................................................................. 6-6 Continuous Paste ........................................................... 6-54 Control SFC type ........................................................... 7-48 Control SFC type program ............................................. 7-49 Conversion ..................................................................... 10-2 Converting ladder blocks ......................................10-2, 10-5 Copy ............................................................................... 6-48 CSV files ........................................................................ 5-33 current value .........................................................12-3, 13-7 Cursor .............................................................................. 2-4 Index - 2 Cut .................................................................................. 6-48 Cutting, Copying, and Pasting SFC Diagrams ............... 7-30 [D] Data type .......... 5-4, 5-8, 5-10, 5-14, 5-15, 5-23, 5-24, 5-26 Data Type Selection screen ..................................5-14, 5-15 Delete Column ............................................................... 6-41 Delete Horizontal Line .................................................... 6-37 Delete Line ............................................................5-18, 6-37 Delete Row ..................................................................... 6-41 Delete Vertical Line ........................................................ 6-37 Deleting columns ............................................................ 6-44 Deleting notes ................................................................ 9-12 Deleting SFC Diagrams ........................................7-27, 7-33 Deleting statements ................................................9-8, 9-17 Deleting vertical lines ..................................................... 6-38 Device ............................................................. 5-4, 5-8, 5-26 Device check .................................................................. 10-4 Device Comment ......................................2-7, 2-8, 9-2, 13-4 device comment (label comment)/statement ................... 2-7 Device Comment Display Format .................................. 13-5 display conditions of monitoring ..................................... 12-3 Display Connection of Ladder Diagram ........................... 2-9 display format ........................................................12-3, 13-7 Docking window ............................................................... 2-3 Draw vertical and horizontal lines consecutively ............ 6-30 dummy coil ..................................................................... 7-35 Dummy step ................................................................... 7-10 duplicated coil .......................................................6-14, 13-4 Duplicated coil check ..................................................... 10-4 [E] Edit Line ......................................................................... 6-30 Editing screen ...........................................................2-4, 6-2 Element ............................................................................ 6-6 Element selection field ..................................................... 6-7 END line ........................................................................... 2-4 end step ......................................................................... 7-23 Enter Symbol screen ........................................................ 6-6 Entering device comments ............................................. 6-15 Entering I Statement ........................................................ 9-5 Entering notes .........................................................9-9, 9-10 Entering P statements and I statements ...................9-5, 9-6 Entering statements ..................................................9-4, 9-5 Entering vertical lines ..................................................... 6-31 Entry Ladder Monitor .........................................12-11, 12-16 [F] Falling Pulse ..................................................................... 6-6 Falling Pulse Branch ........................................................ 6-6 Falling Pulse Close Branch .............................................. 6-6 FB ..................................................................................... 4-3 Find Jump Step ................................................................ 8-9 [I] I Statement .......................................................................9-3 Inactive step .................................................................12-13 Increment .......................................................................13-7 Inline structured text .......................................................6-23 Inline structured text box ................................................6-24 Insert Column .................................................................6-41 Insert mode ......................................... 6-2, 6-34, 6-49, 6-53 Insert Row ......................................................................6-41 Inserting ..........................................................................6-67 Inserting columns ...........................................................6-43 Inserting lines within line statements ..............................9-16 Instruction check ............................................................10-4 Instruction device entry field .............................................6-7 interrupt pointer number ................. 6-16, 9-3, 9-5, 9-6, 9-14 Invert Operation Results ...................................................6-6 [J] Jump ............................................. 8-5, 8-8, 8-10, 8-12, 9-20 jump destination step number .............................. 2-23, 7-22 Jump to Previous Ladder Block Start .............................6-29 JUMP transition ..............................................................7-22 Jumping to notes ............................................................9-20 Jumping to specified statement and note .......................9-20 [L] label ..................................................................................5-2 Label Name ........................................... 5-4, 5-8, 5-10, 5-23 Ladder check ..................................................................10-4 Ladder Editor ....................................................................2-4 Left power rail ...................................................................2-4 Line statement .......................................................... 9-3, 9-4 Line statement list ..........................................................9-27 link memory ....................................................................13-7 List of Functions ...............................................................1-4 Local label .............................................................. 5-8, 5-10 [N] EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 11 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU Hiding warning messages ..............................................10-9 High Performance Model QCPU ................................... A-22 Horizontal Line ...............................................................6-30 12 Navigation window ...........................................................2-3 nesting number ......................................................... 2-5, 6-5 New Declaration (After) ..................................................5-17 New Declaration (Before) ...............................................5-17 next coil ............................................................................8-4 next contact ......................................................................8-3 next device .......................................................................8-3 Normal SFC type ............................................................7-48 note ...................................................................2-7, 9-2, 9-3 number of contacts ................................................. 2-9, 13-5 number of contacts to be displayed ..................................2-9 [O] offset values ...................................................................5-27 on hold ..........................................................................12-13 Open Branch ....................................................................6-6 Open Contact ...................................................................6-6 Operation Result Falling Pulse .........................................6-6 Operation Result Rising Pulse .........................................6-6 options ............................................................................13-2 Output window .......................... 2-3, 10-6, 10-7, 10-9, 10-19 overwrite mode .................................................................6-2 MONITORING [H] 10 13 SETTING OPTIONS Global label ......................................................................5-3 GX Developer ................................................................ A-22 GX Works2 .................................................................... A-22 main frame .......................................................................2-2 master control ........................................................... 2-5, 6-5 Menu bar ..........................................................................2-3 Modifying notes ...........................................9-11, 9-12, 9-15 Modifying statements ............................................... 9-7, 9-8 Modifying statements and notes .....................................9-15 Monitor (write mode) ........................................................6-4 Monitor mode ...................................................................6-4 Monitored Value .............................................................13-7 Monitoring buffer memory and link memory ...................12-4 Monitoring link memory ..................................................12-4 Monitoring programs ......................................................12-2 Monitoring SFC Programs .....................12-13, 12-17, 12-20 Monitoring SFC step active/inactive status ..................12-19 Monitoring stop condition setting ..................................12-21 Monitoring Zoom ..........................................................12-17 Moving notes ..................................................................9-17 Moving statements or notes ...........................................9-17 A APPENDIX [G] 9 [M] I [P] P/I Statement screen ........................................................9-5 parameters for SFC programs ........................................7-47 Paste ..............................................................................6-48 Paste Data screen ..........................................................7-30 Performing merge process ................................... 9-28, 9-29 Peripheral ....................................... 9-3, 9-4, 9-9, 9-15, 9-28 Personal computer ........................................................ A-22 PLC ..................................................................................9-3 Index - 3 INDEX Function Block ................................................................7-35 function block selection window .......................................2-3 FXGP(DOS) ...................................................................12-5 FXGP(WIN) ....................................................................12-5 GX Works2 INDEX pointer number .......................................6-16, 9-5, 9-6, 9-14 Program Configurations ................................................... 4-2 Project view ...................................................................... 4-2 [Q] QCPU (Q mode) ............................................................A-22 [R] Read from CSV File screen ........................................... 6-72 Read from PLC ........................................... 9-28, 9-29, 11-2 Read mode ...................................................................... 6-4 Reading Data from Programmable Controller CPU ....... 11-2 Reading symbolic information from programmable controller CPU ............................................................................... 11-5 Rebuild All ...................................................................... 10-7 reference window ........................................................... 12-9 Registered ladder block ............................................... 12-14 Related manuals ............................................................A-16 Remark ............................................................................ 5-4 Replace ............................................................................ 8-2 Reset Destination Step .................................................. 8-11 reset destination step number ........................................ 2-23 Reset step ...................................................................... 7-11 Restoring ........................................................................ 6-61 Return to previous position .............................................. 8-4 Right power rail ................................................................ 2-4 Rising Pulse ..................................................................... 6-6 Rising Pulse Branch ......................................................... 6-6 Rising Pulse Close ........................................................... 6-6 Rising Pulse Close Branch .............................................. 6-6 Row .................................................................................. 2-8 simple search ................................................................... 8-2 Simultaneous Convergence ........................................... 7-19 Simultaneous Divergence .............................................. 7-16 Sort SFC Step No. ......................................................... 7-32 Specification of the module I/O number ........................... 8-7 start destination block number ..............................2-23, 7-12 start I/O numbers ............................................................. 8-6 Starting monitoring programs ......................................... 12-2 statement ......................................................................... 9-2 Status bar ......................................................................... 2-3 Step number ..................................................................... 2-4 Step number of jump destination ................................... 8-11 Stopping monitoring programs ....................................... 12-2 stops compilation ........................................................... 10-8 structure ......................................................................... 5-23 Structure Array ............................................................... 5-26 Structure Device Setting screen .........5-24, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27 Structure Setting ............................................................ 5-23 Structured Data Types ................................................... 5-23 Structured project ...........................................................A-23 [T] T/C setting values .................................................6-69, 7-52 text size ............................................................................ 2-6 Title bar .....................................................................2-3, 2-4 Toolbar ............................................................................. 2-3 Transition .......................................................... 7-3, 7-4, 7-5 transition comment ...................................... 2-23, 7-14, 9-30 Transition number .......................................................... 2-23 two- or three-dimensional array ..................................... 5-16 Types ............................................................................... 9-3 [S] [U] Search .............................................................................. 8-2 Search for a statements and notes ................................ 9-20 Searching for notes ........................................................ 9-20 Selection Convergence .................................................. 7-17 Selection Divergence ..................................................... 7-15 Series transition ............................................................. 7-13 Setting the property of SFC programs ........................... 7-48 SFC All Block Batch Monitoring ................................... 12-18 SFC block ...................................................................... 7-41 SFC block list ................................................................. 7-45 SFC comment ................................................................ 9-30 SFC Editor ..................................................................... 2-18 SFC Row Setting ........................................................... 2-26 SFC step .................................................................7-2, 7-10 SFC step attribute .................................................7-11, 7-29 SFC step comment ............................2-23, 7-11, 7-12, 9-30 SFC step number ........................................................... 2-23 SFC step/transition comments ....................................... 2-25 Simple editing of devices/labels ....................................... 6-8 Simple project ................................................................A-23 Undefined Label Registration ........................................... 6-9 Undo ............................................................................... 6-60 Use Bit Designation ........................................................ 5-28 Using bit specification .................................................... 5-25 Index - 4 [V] Vertical Line ..........................................................6-30, 6-31 [W] warning message ..................................................10-9, 13-9 Word Device ................................................................... 12-3 Work window .................................................................... 2-3 wrapping destination symbol .......................................... 6-18 wrapping lines .......................... 6-17, 6-62, 6-63, 6-64, 6-65 wrapping source symbol ................................................ 6-17 Write mode ....................................................................... 6-4 Write to CSV File ............................................................ 6-71 Write to PLC ................................................................... 11-2 Writing Data to Programmable Controller CPU .............. 11-2 9 EDITING COMMENTS/ STATEMENTS/NOTES Writing symbolic information to Programmable Controller CPU ........................................................................................11-5 [Z] Zoom ...................................................................... 2-6, 7-35 CONVERTING/ COMPILING PROGRAMS 10 WRITING/READING DATA TO/FROM PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU 11 MONITORING 12 SETTING OPTIONS 13 APPENDIX A INDEX I Index - 5 Microsoft, Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation. All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE German Branch Gothaer Straße 8 D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 MITSUBISHIELECTRICEUROPEB.V.-org.sl. CZECH REP. Czech Branch Avenir Business Park, Radlická 714/113a CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 Fax: +420 - 251-551-471 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE French Branch 25, Boulevard des Bouvets F-92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND Irish Branch Westgate Business Park, Ballymount IRL-Dublin 24 Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY Italian Branch Viale Colleoni 7 I-20864 Agrate Brianza (MB) Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. POLAND Poland Branch Krakowska 50 PL-32-083 Balice Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. RUSSIA 52, bld. 3 Kosmodamianskaya nab 8 floor RU-115054 Мoscow Phone: +7 495 721-2070 Fax: +7 495 721-2071 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN Spanish Branch Carretera de Rubí 76-80 E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona) Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131 Fax: +34 935891579 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK UK Branch Travellers Lane UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00 Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN Office Tower “Z” 14 F 8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku Tokyo 104-6212 Phone: +81 3 622 160 60 Fax: +81 3 622 160 75 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc. USA 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills, IL 60061 Phone: +1 847 478 21 00 Fax: +1 847 478 22 53 GEVA AUSTRIA Wiener Straße 89 AT-2500 Baden Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 TECHNIKON BELARUS Oktyabrskaya 19, Off. 705 BY-220030 Minsk Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 ESCO DRIVES & AUTOMATION BELGIUM Culliganlaan 3 BE-1831 Diegem Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 30 Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 31 Koning & Hartman b.v. BELGIUM Woluwelaan 31 BE-1800 Vilvoorde Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 INEA RBT d.o.o. BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Aleja Lipa 56 BA-71000 Sarajevo Phone: +387 (0)33 / 921 164 Fax: +387 (0)33/ 524 539 AKHNATON BULGARIA 4, Andrei Ljapchev Blvd., PO Box 21 BG-1756 Sofia Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6000 Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 INEA RBT d.o.o. CROATIA Losinjska 4 a HR-10000 Zagreb Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 AutoCont C.S. s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC Technologická 374/6 CZ-708 00 Ostrava-Pustkovec Phone: +420 595 691 150 Fax: +420 595 691 199 Beijer Electronics A/S DENMARK Lykkegårdsvej 17 DK-4000 Roskilde Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66 Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26 Beijer Electronics Eesti OÜ ESTONIA Pärnu mnt.160i EE-11317 Tallinn Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Peltoie 37 FIN-28400 Ulvila Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 540 Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 541 UTECO GREECE 5, Mavrogenous Str. GR-18542 Piraeus Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900 Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999 MELTRADE Kft. HUNGARY Fertő utca 14. HU-1107 Budapest Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA Ritausmas iela 23 LV-1058 Riga Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280 Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281 Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA Savanoriu Pr. 187 LT-02300 Vilnius Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101 Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980 ALFATRADE Ltd. MALTA 99, Paola Hill Malta- Paola PLA 1702 Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA bld. Traian 23/1 MD-2060 Kishinev Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280 HIFLEX AUTOM.TECHNIEK B.V. NETHERLANDS Wolweverstraat 22 NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone: +31 (0)180 – 46 60 04 Fax: +31 (0)180 – 44 23 55 Koning & Hartman b.v. NETHERLANDS Haarlerbergweg 21-23 NL-1101 CH Amsterdam Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05 Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Postboks 487 NO-3002 Drammen Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00 Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77 Fonseca S.A. PORTUGAL R. João Francisco do Casal 87/89 PT - 3801-997 Aveiro, Esgueira Phone: +351 (0)234 / 303 900 Fax: +351 (0)234 / 303 910 Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3 RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6 Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02 INEA RBT d.o.o. SERBIA Izletnicka 10 SER-113000 Smederevo Phone: +381 (0)26 / 615 401 Fax: +381 (0)26 / 615 401 SIMAP s.r.o. SLOVAKIA Jána Derku 1671 SK-911 01 Trencín Phone: +421 (0)32 743 04 72 Fax: +421 (0)32 743 75 20 PROCONT, spol. s r.o. Prešov SLOVAKIA Kúpelná 1/A SK-080 01 Prešov Phone: +421 (0)51 7580 611 Fax: +421 (0)51 7580 650 INEA RBT d.o.o. SLOVENIA Stegne 11 SI-1000 Ljubljana Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8116 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170 Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Box 426 SE-20124 Malmö Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00 Fax: +46 (0)40 / 93 23 01 Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND Im Schörli 5 CH-8600 Dübendorf Phone: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 80 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 28 GTS TURKEY Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok. No:5 TR-34775 Yukarı Dudullu-Ümraniye-İSTANBUL Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90 Fax: +90 (0)216 526 3995 CSC Automation Ltd. UKRAINE 4-B, M. Raskovoyi St. UA-02660 Kiev Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55 Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66 EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES TOO Kazpromavtomatika Ul. Zhambyla 28 KAZ-100017 Karaganda Phone: +7 7212 / 50 10 00 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50 KAZAKHSTAN MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES I.C. SYSTEMS LTD. EGYPT 23 Al-Saad-Al-Alee St. EG-Sarayat, Maadi, Cairo Phone: +20 (0) 2 / 235 98 548 Fax: +20 (0) 2 / 235 96 625 ILAN & GAVISH Ltd. ISRAEL 24 Shenkar St., Kiryat Arie IL-49001 Petah-Tiqva Phone: +972 (0)3 / 922 18 24 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 924 0761 GIRIT CELADON LTD ISRAEL 12 H'aomanut Street IL-42505 Netanya Phone: +972 (0)9 / 863 39 80 Fax: +972 (0)9 / 885 24 30 CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA Lebanon - Beirut Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 430 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 438 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd. Private Bag 2016 ZA-1600 Isando Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0770 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0761 SOUTH AFRICA Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// [email protected] /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project